JP2020127777A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can enhance attractiveness of games by using music to be output while at least games are played.SOLUTION: A game machine has output means which outputs music while at least a game player plays a game. Dynamic display execution means which causes display means to execute dynamic display of identification information has start means which starts an invisible state of the identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information, according to the timing of a beat of the music which is output by the output means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, various effect images such as a variable effect (dynamic display of identification information) are displayed on a display unit such as a liquid crystal display device in order to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1). While such an effect is being performed, background music (Back Ground Music: BGM) is output from the gaming machine, further enhancing the interest of the game.

JP 2001-046635 A

However, in the conventional game machine, the background music is rarely interesting, and there is a situation in which the game is not so much improved in interest.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game by using music output at least during a period in which the game is played. Has an aim.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 makes a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a dynamic display of identification information based on the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition. And a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means triggered by the instruction from the instruction means. When a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by, the player is given a predetermined game value, and at least a period during which the player is playing the game. The output means outputs the predetermined music under a condition different from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information instructed by the instructing means, and the dynamic display executing means outputs the output by the output means. Means for changing the visual recognition state of the identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information is provided in accordance with the timing of a predetermined beat of music.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the determination means for making a determination when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the instruction means for instructing to start the dynamic display of the identification information based on the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition, Dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means triggered by the instruction by the instruction means, and the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of, a predetermined game value is given to the player, and at least during the period when the game is being played by the player, The dynamic display execution means includes an output means for outputting a predetermined music under a condition different from the start of the dynamic display of the instructed identification information, and the dynamic display execution means has a timing of a beat of the predetermined music output by the output means. In accordance with the above, since the means for changing the visual recognition state of the identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information is provided, at least the music output during the period of the game is used to improve the enjoyment of the game. Can be planned.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the first accessory, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of an origin detection sensor. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram that schematically shows a big hit random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram that schematically shows a big hit type table, and (c) is a big hit fluctuation pattern table. FIG. 3D is a schematic diagram schematically showing a deviation (normal) variation pattern table, and FIG. 6E is a schematic deviation diagram (probability variation) variation pattern table. It is the schematic diagram shown. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically various data stored in RAM in a voice lamp control device. It is a timing chart showing an example of the operation timing of the first accessory. It is the timing chart which shows the production execution timing when the detailed variation pattern is pseudo continuous as an example of the variation production. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display data table for a change. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the additional data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit. 7 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed a part of sound edit / output process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed a part of sound edit / output process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed a part of start winning a prize sound output processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed a part of start winning a prize sound output processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the figure which showed the sounding timing of the ball entry sound when a ball enters the first entrance port one by one during one beat of BGM. (A) is a diagram showing the sounding timing of the incoming sound when three balls enter the first entrance in one beat of BGM, and (b) is a diagram showing the sounding timing of the incoming sound. Sound of two balls entering the first entrance during one beat, and one more ball entering the first entrance until the back beat of the next beat FIG. 6C is a diagram for explaining the sounding timing of, and (c) shows that one ball enters the first entrance during one beat of BGM, and further until the back beat of the next beat. It is a figure explaining the sounding timing of the ball entrance sound when two balls enter the first ball entrance. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flow chart showing the number-of-holding-balls command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing the confirmation command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. Yes, (c) is a flowchart showing a demo command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is the flowchart which showed a part of display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. 7 is a flowchart showing a pending image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed a part of sound edit / output process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed a part of start winning a prize sound output processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically various data stored in RAM in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display data table for a change. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. 7 is a flowchart showing a detailed fluctuation pattern setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a display command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed a part of sound edit / output process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed a part of sound edit / output process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed a part of start winning a prize sound output processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed a part of start winning a prize sound output processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed a part of display setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed a part of start winning a prize sound output process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed a part of start winning a prize sound output processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the various data stored in RAM in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed a part of sound edit / output process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed a part of sound edit / output process performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the various data stored in RAM in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of BGM change process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. 7 is a flowchart showing a display command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed a part of sound edit / output process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 43, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower parts on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface protruding to the front, and prize balls, rental balls and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to descend to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. Operated.

The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are made uniform, and is performed in accordance with the entrance (start prize) into the first entrance 64 described later. Various productions such as variable productions and reach productions are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. For example, a "town stage" with a town motif, a "sea stage" with a sea motif, a "mountain stage" with a mountain motif, etc. are prepared as stages. The change of the stage is performed when the player operates the frame button 22 during a period in which no change effect is performed or during high-speed change.

Further, when the normal reach effect is started on the third symbol display device 81, when the normal reach is expanded to the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the normal reach. Is configured. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect contents at the time of super reach are changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. For example, on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and during a jackpot or reach effect, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front face frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). ), etc., is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

A ball rental operating unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as the balance information.

The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on the information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not needed in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central part of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a for pressing, a push button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. (Not shown) and are built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, and thereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, there is provided a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, a windmill and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first winning opening 63. The ball entrance (starting opening) 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and wood screws are applied from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area formed by partitioning the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 on the front surface of the game board 13 (where a winning opening or the like is provided, and a shot ball is It is the area that flows down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

The first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side of FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by a main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the variation is performed in association with the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting winning), or a stop pattern after the variation is completed. As a result, a symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the starting winning is shown by a lighting state, or a ball (reserved ball) that has not been changed among the balls entered in the first entrance 64 The number of reserved balls, which is the number, is indicated by a lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the entrance into the first entrance 64, whether or not it is a jackpot is determined, and when it is determined that a jackpot, the jackpot type is also determined. .. As the types of jackpots determined here, 15R certainty variation jackpots, 2R certainty variation jackpots, and time saving jackpots are prepared. The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but when it is a big hit, a symbol according to the jackpot type is shown.

Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after the 15 rounds jackpot, and the “2R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 2 rounds. It is a probability change jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, the “time saving jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot with the maximum round number of 15 rounds and is in a shortening state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

Also, the "high probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability increases after the jackpot as an added value, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, a game that easily transitions to a special game state. It is the state of. In the high probability state (probably changing) in the present embodiment, the hit probability of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) described later is increased, and the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 is opened. This includes the state of the game in which the ball easily enters the first ball inlet 64 because it becomes easier.

On the other hand, the "low-probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big change is not occurring, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the probability of a big hit is lower than that in the probability change. Also, in the "short-time probability state", the short-time state (time-shortening state) is that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is increased. It is a game state in which a ball easily enters the first entrance 64 because the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is easily opened.

In addition, instead of changing the winning probability of the second symbol, according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time when the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened, or the one hit in the second symbol The number of times the electric accessory is opened may be changed. For example, the time saving state or the high probability state of the low probability state may be a state in which the opening time of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is longer than that in other gaming states. In addition, the time saving state and the high probability state of the low probability state may be a state in which the number of times the electric accessory is released per one time in the second symbol is larger than that in the other game states.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the liquid crystal display that performs the variable display of the third symbol while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol display device 37, triggered by the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 (starting winning) (Hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") composed of a third symbol display device 81, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol (ordinary symbol) triggered by the passage of the ball of the second entrance 67. The second symbol display device 83 is provided. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a first accessory 87 which is a movable accessory for advance notice effect.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIGS. 6 and 12) described later, for example, left, center. And the three symbol columns on the right are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is the display of the first symbol display device 37. According to the above, a decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4(a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9". Each main symbol is formed by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are attached to the front of the wooden box with attached designs that imitate characters such as plane, furoshiki, and helmet. An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached design, and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached design.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 6) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The jackpot is generated after the fluctuation display is finished. When transitioning to a high probability state (probability change state) after the end of a big hit, a variable display in which main symbols (“high probability symbols”, “probability variation patterns”) to which odd numbers are added are displayed. On the other hand, when transitioning to the low-probability state after the end of the big hit, a variable display in which main symbols (“low-probability symbol”, “normal symbol”) to which an even number is added are arranged is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, other than that. The upper third ⅓ is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed on the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from the top to the bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol column Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle and lower three rows for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of the jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the present embodiment) is arranged on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small region Ds1 is a region for displaying the number of reserved balls which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64, and the small region Ds2 And Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely to transition to a big hit than usual. In the small area Ds2 in the center, usually, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy with a hachimaki) performs a predetermined action, sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character appears. A notice production is performed by putting it out.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, one variation display as one aspect of the variation effect performed on the third symbol display device 81 in association with the entry into the first entry slot 64 (starting winning). Among them, the pseudo variation of the third symbol is continuously performed a plurality of times, so-called "pseudo-relation" can be performed. "Pseudo run" is a type of notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation that a big hit will be obtained as a result of the change display in which the pseudo run is executed. During one change display, the pseudo stop and re-change of the third symbol ( The variation effect is performed in a manner in which (pseudo variation) is repeatedly performed.

In the “pseudo-run”, the larger the number of times the pseudo stop and the re-change are repeated during this one variation display (that is, the number of times the pseudo variation is continuously performed), the jackpot is given after the variation display. The number of repetitions is determined so as to increase expectations. As a result, the more the pseudo variation is performed during one variation display, the more the player can feel the possibility of a big hit. Therefore, by performing the variable effect by the "pseudo-relation", it is possible to increase the interest in the game for the player.

When the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times of the ball entry is reserved up to four times. , The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, and is also shown in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved sphere number pattern is displayed for each one reserved sphere number, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed according to the displayed number of the reserved sphere number patterns. That is, when one reserved sphere number design is displayed in the small area Ds1, it is indicated that the number of reserved spheres is one sphere, and when four reserved sphere count designs are displayed, the number of reserved spheres is It shows that it is four balls. If the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and three times is reserved. It may be set to the number below or five times or more (for example, eight times). Also, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80, the game board 13, the front frame 12, etc., are provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls is set according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state. May be displayed.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The first accessory 87 is a disk-shaped movable accessory when viewed from the front of the game area, and is used for advance notice production. The first accessory 87 is normally located at the origin position as an initial position, is stored inside the upper side of the center frame 86, and is invisible to the player. Then, when the notice production is performed by the first accessory 87, the first accessory 87 operates as follows.

That is, at an arbitrary timing of the variation effect of the third symbol performed on the third symbol display device 81, the first accessory 87 descends from the center frame 86 and moves up and down when reaching a certain position. If the variation effect is a big hit, after the first accessory 87 moves up and down, it descends to the maximum descending position (maximum point position) and rotates clockwise in the front view of the game area (direction of arrow A in FIG. 2). By operating, a notice effect (so-called one-shot announcement effect) that gives a notice of a big hit in the variation effect is performed.

On the other hand, when the variation effect is disengaged, the first accessory 87 does not descend to the maximum point position after moving up and down, but rises and is stored inside the upper side of the center frame 86 again. As a result, while the first accessory 87 is moving up and down, the player can expect the first accessory 87 to descend to the maximum point position and become a jackpot, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. You can In addition, when the first accessory 87 descends to the maximum point position, it is possible to give the player a great joy and a sense of superiority of being a big hit.

An LED (not shown) is built in the vicinity of the center of rotation of the first character object 87. By turning on or blinking the LED together with the rotation operation of the first character object 87, the notice effect is further enhanced. To be emphasized. In addition, according to the operation of the first accessory 87, an image in which the brightness around the first accessory 87 is increased is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the notice effect by the first accessory 87 is further emphasized, and the joy of the player can be further enhanced.

Here, the configuration of the first accessory 87 will be described with reference to FIG. The first accessory 87 employs a rack and opinion system as a structure for moving the first accessory 87 up and down, and includes a first accessory up-and-down moving motor 87a, a drive gear 87b that is a gear, and a driven gear. It has 87c and a slide gear 87d. Although not shown, a first accessory rotating motor 87e (see FIG. 6) for rotating the first accessory 87 is provided. When the first accessory rotating motor 87e is driven, the first accessory 87 rotates clockwise in a front view of the game area (direction of arrow A in FIG. 2).

The first accessory up-and-down movement motor 87a is a stepping motor, and by applying a pulse signal, the drive gear 87b is driven and rotated in given step units. The driven gear 87c is meshed with the drive gear 87b and is driven to rotate by the rotational force of the drive gear 87b.

The first slide gear 87d is formed by cutting a flat bar into teeth, is meshed with the driven gear 87c, and is capable of reciprocating in the vertical direction with the rotation of the driven gear 87c. .. The first accessory 87 is connected to the lower end of the first slide gear 87d.

Therefore, by driving and rotating the drive gear 87a in steps by the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a, the slide gear 87d moves vertically in steps by the driven gear 87c. Accordingly, the first accessory 87 can be moved up and down within the range from the origin position to the maximum point position. In the pachinko machine 10, when the first accessory 87 is at the origin position, if the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is driven 100 steps in the direction in which the first accessory 87 descends, the first accessory 87 is moved. Is configured to reach the maximum point position.

The drive control of the first accessory moving motor 87a and the first accessory rotating motor 87e is performed by a voice lamp, which will be described later, for controlling output of voice, lighting and extinguishing of the illumination parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, and the like. It is performed by the controller 112.

A protrusion 87f is provided on the upper end of the slide gear 87d. Further, the origin detection sensor 88 is provided at the position of the protrusion 87f of the slide gear 87d when the first accessory 87 is at the origin position. Further, the maximum point detection sensor 89 is provided at the position of the protrusion 87f of the slide gear 87d when the first accessory 87 is at the maximum point position.

Here, the configuration of the origin detection sensor 88 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5B is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the origin detection sensor 88. Since the maximum point detection sensor 89 has the same configuration as the origin detection sensor 88, the description thereof will be omitted.

The origin detection sensor 88 includes a light emitting element mounting portion 88a to which a light emitting element (not shown) is mounted, a light receiving element mounting portion 88b to which a light receiving element (not shown) is mounted, and one end of the light emitting element mounting portion 88a. A light emitting element mounting portion 88b is connected to one end of the light emitting element and the light receiving element so as to be opposed to each other by a predetermined distance. A detection groove 88d is formed by the portion 88a, the light receiving element mounting portion 88b, and the connecting portion 88c.

When there is no insert in the detection groove 88d, the light emitted from the light emitting element mounted on the light emitting element mounting portion 88a is directly received by the light receiving element mounted on the light receiving element mounting portion 88b. On the other hand, when the insert is inserted into the detection groove 88d, the light emitted from the light emitting element mounted on the light emitting element mounting portion 88a is blocked, and the light is received by the light receiving element mounted on the light receiving element mounting portion 95b. Can not. The origin detection sensor 88 outputs an OFF signal when light is received by the light receiving element and an ON signal when light is not received by the light receiving element, so that in the control device that receives the signal, some insertion object is present in the detection groove 88d. It can be determined whether it has been inserted.

In this origin detection sensor 88, the light emitting element mounting portion 88a is arranged in the front side in front view, the light receiving element mounting portion 85b is arranged in the rear side in front view, the connecting portion 88c is arranged in left side in front view, and the first accessory 87 is at the origin position. The projection 87f of the slide gear 87d is inserted into the detection groove 88d so that the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked. Therefore, when the origin detection sensor 88 detects that the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked, the origin detection sensor 88 outputs an ON signal, so that the control device has the first role. It can be determined that the object 87 has reached the origin position.

Further, the maximum point detection sensor 89 is arranged in the same direction as the origin detection sensor 88, the first accessory 87 is at the maximum point position, and the projection 87f of the slide gear 87d is inside the detection groove of the maximum point detection sensor 89. It is mounted so that the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked by being inserted. Therefore, when the maximum point detecting sensor 89 detects that the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked, the maximum point detecting sensor 89 outputs an ON signal, whereby the control device It can be determined that the one character object 87 has reached the maximum point position.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 displays a variable display in which the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as display symbols (second symbol) are alternately turned on every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67. It is something to do. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped by a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "○"), the first entrance 64 is activated for a predetermined time (open). Is configured). The number of times the ball has passed through the second ball entrance 67 is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 described above and is also lit and displayed on the second symbol reserve lamp 84. Four of the second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol. Alternatively, a part of the display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing through the second entrance 67 is not limited to 4 as in the case of the first entrance 64, and is not more than 3 or not less than 5 (for example, , 8 times). Moreover, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may not be lit.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance (starting winning opening) 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, which results from the turning on of the first entrance switch. Then, a lottery for the jackpot is made in the main controller 110, and the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is started (started). Then, after a lapse of a predetermined fluctuation time, the fluctuation display is stopped, the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result is the third symbol display. It is stopped and displayed on the activated line L1 of the device 81. Moreover, the first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize holes through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally elongated rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variation time) elapses so as to be a big hit stop symbol, and The stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the big hit is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening/closing on the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. It has and. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower side of the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normally closed state. The state and the state operate alternately.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning is performed. A special game state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a while opening the opening 65a. It may be formed.

Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp etc. affixed to the adhesive space K1 is the front frame 14 It can be seen through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 66. On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclines toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, and has a ROM 202 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and various data temporarily stored when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A RAM 203, which is a memory for storing, and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

In the main control device 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a jackpot variation pattern table 202c, and an outlier variation pattern table 202d as fixed value data used for controlling these processes. Further, in the RAM 203, main processing of the pachinko machine 10 (big hit lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display result on the second symbol display device 83, etc.) is controlled. Various counters are provided to do this.

Here, various counters provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and various tables 202a to 202d stored in the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. First, FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters.

To set the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol. The stop pattern selection counter C3, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for fluctuation pattern selection are used. Moreover, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16) or at an interval of 4 milliseconds in the main processing (see FIG. 22). Further, some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 22). The updated value of each counter is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203b set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The counter buffer 203b is an area for storing the updated value of each counter, and the MPU 201 uses the value stored in the counter buffer 203b for each counter at the update timing of the counter. Update the counter.

The RAM 203 is provided with a holding ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The holding area has respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 read from the counter buffer 203b in synchronization with the timing of entering the first entrance 64. Is an area for temporarily storing (holding). The execution area also stores a first random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter C3 that are used to determine the change pattern and stop type of the jackpot lottery or change effect at the change start timing. It is an area for doing.

When the MPU 201 detects a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), each of the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 of the counter buffer 203b at that time. The value is stored in one of the reserved first to fourth areas. At this time, if there is no reservation in the reservation area and all of the reservation first to fourth areas are empty areas, the value of each counter is stored in the reservation first area. When there is only one hold in the hold area and the value of each counter is stored only in the hold first area, the value of each counter is stored in the hold second area. When there are two reservations in the reservation area and the values of the respective counters are stored only in the reservation first and second areas, the values of the respective counters are stored in the reservation third area. When there are three reservations in the reservation area and the values of the counters are stored only in the reservation first to third areas, the values of the counters are stored in the reservation fourth area.

As a result, the values of the respective counters acquired from the counter buffer 203b at the timing of the starting winning are stored in the holding first area, the holding second area, the holding third area, and the holding fourth area in the order of the starting winning. You can When the value of each counter is stored in all of the holding first to fourth areas, when the start winning is detected, the value of each counter at that time is discarded without being held. That is, in this embodiment, the values of the respective counters can be held up to a maximum of four starting winnings.

Further, at the start timing of the variable effect, the MPU 201 moves the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved first area to the execution area, and Based on the value of each counter stored in the execution area, the jackpot lottery, the variation pattern of the variation effect and the type of the stop symbol are determined.

Further, after the values of the counters in the hold first area are moved to the execution area, the values of the counters stored in the hold second area are shifted to the vacant hold first area and stored in the hold third area. The value of each counter is shifted to the vacant reservation second area, and the value of each counter stored in the reservation fourth area is shifted to the vacant reservation third area. As a result, when the variation effect is started based on the value of each counter held in the holding ball storage area 203c, the holding is reduced by one and one holding area is released.

Each counter will be described in detail. As described above, the first random number counter C1 is a counter for use in the big hit lottery, and is updated regularly (in the present embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process). The first random number counter C1 is updated by sequentially incrementing by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899) and reaching a maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). It is done by returning to 0 afterwards. When the first random number counter C1 makes one round (when the value is periodically updated from a certain initial value and returns to the initial value at the next update), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time Is set as a new initial value in the first random number counter C1, and the initial value is updated.

As described above, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used as the initial value of the first per random number counter C1 and is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first per random number counter C1. For example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also composed of a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated not only once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) is executed, but also repeatedly within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 22).

The value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the counter buffer 203b is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64. Then, at the start of fluctuation, it is determined whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c is a value of a random number that is a big hit (a big hit random number value, also called a hit value), and a big hit. Draw lots. The value of the random number to be a big hit (big hit random number value) is set by the big hit random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the holding ball storage area 203c (to be exact, the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203c). When the value of the first big random number counter C1 stored in) matches the big hit random number value set by the big hit random number table 202a, it is determined as a big hit.

Here, details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the jackpot random number table 202a. The big hit random number table 202a shows the value (big hit random number value) of the first big random number counter C1 that is determined as a big hit. The jackpot random number table 202a is a jackpot random number value that is referred to when the gaming state is a low probability state (that is, a period during which the probability is not changing) and a jackpot random number value that is referred to when the gaming state is a high probability state (that is, during a probability changing). It is divided into and configured, and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

In the present embodiment, the first random number counter C1 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. Further, the number of jackpot random number values that are jackpots in the low probability state is three, and the value “7,307,582” is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a in association with the “low probability state”. .. On the other hand, the number of jackpot random numbers that are jackpots in the high probability state is 30, and the values "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322,354,390,420, "448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892" are associated with the "high probability state" and stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. It is stored.

When the jackpot is determined, the MPU 201 reads a jackpot random number value that matches the gaming state at that time from the jackpot random number table 203a. Then, in the MPU 201, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 (the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding sphere storage area 203c) used for the jackpot judgment is the jackpot random number value read from the jackpot random number table 203a. It is determined whether or not it matches one of the above, and if it matches, it is determined as a big hit.

That is, when the gaming state is the low probability state, the big hit occurs when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches any one of "7,307,582". Since the first winning random number counter C1 is updated within the range of 0 to 899, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/300. When the gaming state is a high probability state, the value of the first random number counter C1 is "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322,354,390,420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892”, it is a big hit. Therefore, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/30.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number value read from the jackpot random number table 202a in the low probability state and the jackpot random number value read from the jackpot random number table 202a in the high probability state are set so as not to overlap with each other. The jackpot random number is set. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a big hit random number value regardless of the status of the pachinko machine 10, there is a possibility that the value will be input from the outside and the big hit will be apt to be illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by changing the value of the random number that is a big hit depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high-probability state or the low-probability state), Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the value of the random number, it is possible to suppress fraud.

Returning to FIG. 7, description of various counters provided in the RAM 203 will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines a big hit type in the case of a big hit, and is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) to obtain a maximum value (for example, 0 to 99). In the case of a counter that can take a value, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), Together with the first random number counter C1, it is stored in any one of the holding first to fourth holding areas provided in the holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the one reserved area in the reserved sphere storage area 203c is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is out of alignment, a variation pattern in the variation effect Alternatively, the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as “stop type”) is the one at the time of disconnection. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the one holding area in the holding ball storage area 203c is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuating effect are those at the time of the big hit. .. In this case, the variation pattern and the stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202.

Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 8B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 are associated with each other.

As the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum round number shifts to a high-probability state after a 15-round jackpot, the “15R probability variation jackpot”, and the maximum round number shifts to a low-probability state after a 15-round jackpot. There is a "15R regular jackpot" that is a time-saving state during the number of fluctuations, and a "2R certainty variation jackpot" that shifts to a high-probability state after the maximum round number of 2 rounds.

In the jackpot type table 202b, each jackpot type is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 8B, the value “0 to 39” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variation big hit, and the value “40 to 40” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R regular big hit. 79" is associated, and the value "80 to 99" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability variation big hit.

When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a big hit value, the big hit type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the big hit type table 202b. .. For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability variation big hit" is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60", the big hit type is " "15R normal big hit" is determined, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90", "2R certainty variation big hit" is determined as the big hit type.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the case of a big hit, the 15R certainty jackpot is selected with a 40% probability, the 15R regular jackpot is selected with a 40% probability, and the 2R certainty jackpot is selected with a 20% probability. .. In addition, the probability that each jackpot type is selected when it becomes a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each big hit type is defined in the big hit type table 202b.

Returning to FIG. 7, description of various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is for determining the type of the stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") in the case of being out of alignment, for example, one is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 99, and the maximum value ( In other words, after reaching 99), it returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As the stop type to be selected in the present embodiment, after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol and stops, and “rear out-of-front reach”, and also after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol There are three stop (effect) patterns: "reach other than out of front/rear", which stops before and after the reach pattern, and "complete disengagement" in which reach does not occur.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), the RAM 203 stores the value. It is stored in any of the holding areas among the holding first to fourth areas provided in the holding ball storage area 203c. Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the one holding area in the holding ball storage area 203c is not a big hit random number, that is, if it is a random number that is out of reach, it is a stop type in the fluctuating effect. Is the one at the time of disengagement. In this case, the stop type at the time of detachment is determined based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area.

In the present embodiment, the ROM 202 is provided with a plurality of tables (not shown) corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3 and having different ranges of random number values for which stop types are selected. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state or the low probability state.

For example, in the high-probability state, a large table is selected such that the range of the random number values corresponding to the stop type of “complete deviation” is 0 to 89, so that the reach effect is not unnecessarily selected because the jackpot is likely to occur. It is easy to select "Completely missed". In this table, the range of random numbers corresponding to "rear out of front and back" and "reach other than out of front and back" is narrow. It is difficult to select "reach out" or "reach other than out-of-front-reach".

Also, in the low probability state, a table is selected in which the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “complete deviation” is 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. This makes it difficult to select “Completely off”. In this table, the range of the random number values corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than out-of-front/backward" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than out-of-front/rearward" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, since many reach displays having a long effect time can be performed, it is possible to secure a ball entry time into the first entrance 64, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "out-of-front/rear reach" is set to 98,99.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is a loop counter used for determining the fluctuation pattern, and is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. There is. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once every 4 milliseconds in the main processing (see FIG. 22) described later, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main processing.

At the start of fluctuation, the MPU 201 refers to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of the counter buffer 203b and the fluctuation pattern table stored in the ROM 202 to determine the fluctuation pattern to be executed in the fluctuation effect. The fluctuation pattern determined here is the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation.

That is, the main controller 110 determines only the variation time of the symbol variation as the variation pattern. The specific variation mode is set by the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are, based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, from the variation modes in which variation display is possible at the variation time, the third symbol display device. The details of the variation mode of the third symbol displayed at 81 are determined. Then, according to the determined variation mode, the display control device 114 variably displays the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81, and the voice lamp control device 113 also outputs a voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the variation display. The lamps of the lamp display device 227 (illumination parts 29 to 33) are lit and blinked while being output.

As described above, in the main control device 110, only the fluctuation time is determined as the process of determining the fluctuation pattern, and the details of the fluctuation mode according to the fluctuation time are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. decide. The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer and cannot perform complicated processing. However, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the main controller 110 is configured to determine only the fluctuation time. As compared with the case where main control device 110 determines the details of the variation mode, the process of determining the variation pattern of main control device 110 can be performed easily.

Further, when the main control device 110 determines the details of the variation mode, the detailed information of the determined variation mode must be notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the like, and the command required for the notification is, for example, 3 There is a risk of having to be composed of more than bytes, which may complicate sending and receiving commands.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the main control device 110 is configured to determine only the fluctuation time, it suffices to notify the voice lamp control device 113 and the like of only the information regarding the determined fluctuation time. Often, the structure of the command related to the notification can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the command transmission and reception from becoming complicated. Further, even if only the variation time of the symbol variation is determined in the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the variation mode according to the designated variation time from many variation modes. However, since the third symbol display device 81 is configured to perform variable display in the determined variation mode, various variation effects can be given to the player, and the interest of the player is improved. be able to.

By the way, in the present embodiment, as the variation pattern table used for determining the variation pattern (variation time) according to the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern table 202c for jackpot used at the time of jackpot and the variation pattern table 202c for jackpot are used. A deviation pattern table for detachment 202d is prepared. Also, as the deviation pattern table for deviation 202d, the fluctuation pattern for deviation (probability change) depending on whether the game state is a high probability state at the time saving state or the probability changing time, or a low probability state at the normal time excluding the time saving state. A table 202d2 and a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 are prepared.

Here, details of various fluctuation patterns will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 8C is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern table 202 c stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 8C, the jackpot variation pattern table 202c is divided into groups based on the jackpot type. Specifically, it is classified into a 15R jackpot common that is referred to when the jackpot type is the 15R certainty variation jackpot or a 15R regular jackpot, and a 2R certainty variation jackpot dedicated that is referred to when the jackpot type is the 2R certainty variation jackpot. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a big hit random number value at the start of fluctuation, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area is set. Accordingly, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 of the counter buffer 203b is determined from the jackpot variation table 202c.

Common to the 15R jackpot, as fluctuation patterns, there are fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, fluctuation B with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds, and fluctuation C with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds. The variations A to C are associated with the values of the variation type counter CS1 such that the variation A is 0 to 10, the variation B is 11 to 99, and the variation C is 100 to 198.

When the variation A (30 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, the variation effect is performed in the normal reach mode under the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. When the fluctuation B (60 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 control the change effect in a super-reach manner, or the pseudo effect is performed. Be seen. Also, when the variation C (90 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, the variation effect is performed in the special reach mode by the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, or the variation effect by the pseudo-link. Is done.

Nole reach is a reach with a short variation time, and a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the short reach (so-called, the symbols are aligned by stopping the bite) is a variation pattern. Super reach is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after a reach having a longer variation time than the normal reach (for example, reach that develops from long reach or normal reach). In addition, the special reach is a special pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the reach having a longer fluctuation time than the super reach (for example, the reach from the reach that further develops after the super reach or the normal reach is different from the super reach). It is a fluctuation pattern.

The table common to the 15R jackpot is selected in the case of the 15R certainty variation jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot, so that various special reach types are easily selected to give the player a sense of expectation. However, by configuring the normal reach and the super reach to be selected, it is possible to provide a game performance that can expect a jackpot from any reach.

In addition, the normal reach, the super reach, and the special reach executed by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are prepared in a large number with different effect contents even with the same variation time. For example, in addition to the normal reach in which no character is displayed, a reach in which a predetermined character is displayed is prepared when two symbols on the activated line L1 become the same symbol and reach the state, or at other timings. ing. In addition, various characters are prepared to be displayed in this case. In addition, multiple reach with different effect contents are prepared, such as reach that quickly changes and displays the rear image, reach that adds a notice effect before the start of change, reach that adds a big hit by re-change, etc. ing. As a result, a variety of variable effects can be executed and the player's interest can be increased.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation B or the variation C is determined as the variation pattern, not only the reach but also the variation effect by the pseudo-link can be executed by the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. The pseudo-relation further enhances the player's interest.

The variation pattern selected exclusively for the 2R probability variation jackpot is only the 2R variation with a variation time of 59 seconds, and the correlation with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 198. That is, when the jackpot type is the 2R certainty variation jackpot, the 2R variation (59 seconds) is determined as the variation pattern regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1.

When 2R fluctuation (59 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern, one mode is selected from a plurality of prepared 2R probability variable jackpot special fluctuation modes under the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. The variation effect is performed in the selected mode. As the variation mode dedicated to the 2R probability variable jackpot, for example, together with the character "chicken", the variation mode in which the final first symbol (or the third symbol) stops at a specific symbol, or "girl" that does not normally appear Along with the character, a variation mode in which the final first symbol (or third symbol) stops at a specific symbol is included.

Note that the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined by using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, but it may be determined by using a plurality of other fluctuation type counters. For example, other variation type counters may be provided for finely adjusting the variation time within about ±several seconds, and whether or not a notice effect for notifying the start of the jackpot or the reach effect is added before or during the change effect. This may be determined by another fluctuation type counter.

FIG. 8D is a diagram schematically showing an example of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 8D, the detachment (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 is referred to when complete detachment is determined as the stop type at the time of detachment, and only for complete detachment, front/rear detachment, and front/rear detachment. Other than the common reach that is referred when a reach is determined, and the group (group) is divided based on the stop type at the time of deviation, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups. It is attached.

When the variation starts, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is not a jackpot value (a jackpot random number value), that is, a value that is out of range, the gaming state excludes the time saving state. In the normal low probability state, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of the counter buffer 203b is changed according to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. , The deviation pattern (usually).

For the complete deviation only, the variation patterns are variation D that does not reach even after reaching a variation of 7 seconds and variation E that is 10 seconds and a variation time longer than variation D but does not reach reach. The time is as long as 55 seconds, and pseudo fluctuations are performed five times in one fluctuation by pseudo-coupling, and there is fluctuation F which is completely out of reach without reaching reach, and the value of fluctuation type counter CS1 The variation D (7 seconds) is 0 to 98, the variation E (10 seconds) is 99 to 148, and the variation F (55 seconds) is 149 to 198. In addition, there are variations A (30 seconds), variations B (60 seconds), and variations C (90 seconds) described above as variation patterns common to reach, and the association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is variation A. (30 seconds) is 0 to 98, variation B (60 seconds) is 99 to 190, and variation C (90 seconds) is 191 to 198.

FIG. 8E is a diagram schematically showing an example of the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 8E, the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is referred to when complete deviation is determined as the stop type at the time of deviation, like the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1. It is categorized into a complete release only, and a common reach that is referred to when a front/rear outreach and a reach other than the front/rear outreach are determined as a stop type at the time of detachment.

Then, for each of the divided groups, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with the fluctuation pattern selected in each group. It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern selected when only the complete deviation is referred to does not include the fluctuation F (55 seconds), and only the fluctuation D (7 seconds) and the fluctuation E (10 seconds) are selected. Further, the variation pattern selected when the reach common is referred to is the variation A (30 seconds), the variation B (60 seconds), and the variation C (90 seconds) as in the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1. There is).

If the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a value that does not result in a big hit, that is, a value that is out of range, and the gaming state is in a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of probability variation, execution According to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the area, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 of the counter buffer 203b is determined from the deviation (probability change) change pattern table 202d2. To be done.

In the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2, the correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for complete deviation is that the fluctuation D (7 seconds) is 0 to 190 and the fluctuation E (10 seconds) is 191-198. Has become. Further, the association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in common reach is 0 to 98 for variation A (30 seconds), 99 to 190 for variation B, and 191 to 198 for various out-of-range special reach.

The deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d2 is a table that is referred to when the game state is in a time-saving state or a high probability state at the time of probability variation, so that the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. Become. Therefore, in the time saving state or the high probability state, if a variation F having a variation time of 55 seconds or a variation E having a relatively long variation time is frequently performed even if it is completely out of place, the following There is a possibility that it takes a long time to start the variable display, which gives the player a waiting state, which gives the player discomfort. In addition, the operating rate of the hall is reduced, which is not preferable. Therefore, in the case of complete disengagement, when the gaming state is in the time saving state or the high probability state at the time of probability change, the fluctuation F is not selected, and the variation is more than in the normal state except the time saving state. It is possible to reduce the possibility of giving the player discomfort by configuring the variation D having a variation time shorter than that of E to be easily selected and starting the next variation display early. Further, it is possible to prevent the operating rate from extremely decreasing.

Note that the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is selected using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, but it may be selected using a plurality of fluctuation type counters in combination (whether or not there is a notice display or the like). Further, when the reach is established at the time of disengagement, how many symbols are shifted by the first symbol (or the third symbol) that is stopped at the end to stop (for example, one symbol deviated from the front and back, etc.) is another variation type counter. May be determined by

Further, the selection of the deviation type is configured to be divided into the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 and the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2, but there are a plurality of holding balls even when the game state is normal. In the case of (for example, if there are a maximum of four, three or more), the variable display may be terminated early, and therefore the outlying (probability change) variation pattern table 202d2 may be referred to and selected. It may be configured to prepare a variation pattern table for normal use or probability variation corresponding to the number of reserved balls.

Further, in the variation pattern tables for each deviation shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, the variation D and the variation E are simply deviated, and when the deviance is selected, other tables are referred to. , The fluctuation D and the fluctuation E may be selected with a predetermined probability. Of course, also in this case, each table corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

Again, returning to FIG. 7, various counters will be described. As described above, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and for example, is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). It is configured as a loop counter that returns to zero. When the second random number counter C4 makes one cycle (when the value is periodically updated from a certain initial value and returns to the initial value at the next update), the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time point. Is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16), and it is detected that the sphere has passed either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. Is obtained when

The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, when the value of the acquired second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-153", it is determined that the winning is achieved, and the second symbol display device 83 has a symbol "○" as a stop symbol (second symbol). Is displayed and the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value=0 to 250), and is set once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16). While being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 22).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack in which the counter buffer 203b for storing the various counters shown in FIG. 7 and the reserved sphere storage area 203c are stored, as well as the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201. It has an area and a work area (work area) in which various flags, counters, values of I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer when the power is cut off (including the occurrence of a power failure; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 22), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the startup processing when the power is turned on (see FIG. 21). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 20) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

The RAM 203 further includes at least a reserved ball number counter 203a. The number of hold balls counter 203a holds the variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first inlet 64 (starting winning). It is a counter that counts the number of balls (number of waiting times) up to four times. The on-hold ball number counter 203a has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of 4 every time the number of balls held in the first ball entrance 64 increases and the number of balls held on the variable display increases. (See S1403 in FIG. 19). On the other hand, the pending ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the variable display based on the entry into the first entry opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (see S1205 in FIG. 17).

The value of the hold ball number counter 203a (that is, the hold ball number) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command (see S1406 in FIG. 19). The number-of-holding-balls command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the player enters the first ball entrance 64 and increments the number-of-holding-balls counter 203a by one.

The voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the hold ball number counter 203a is incremented by 1, and displays the value of the variable display hold ball number itself held in the main control device 110. Can be obtained. As a result, the variable display pending ball number managed by the pending ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual variable display pending ball number reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it happens, the deviation can be corrected by the next command of the number of reserved balls received.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls to be held based on the number of balls to be held, and displays the number of balls to be held to the display controller 114 each time the number of balls to hold is changed. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved sphere number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved sphere number notified by the display reserved sphere number command.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening/closing driving forward and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input/output port 205. To send.

Further, the input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 20) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a ball, the ball launching unit 112a has a ball launching strength corresponding to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and a first accessory. The drive of 87 and the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 are controlled.

The audio lamp control device 113 includes an MPU 221 which is an arithmetic device that controls the entire audio lamp control device 113, and a sound output LSI 301 that generates a sound to be reproduced and drives the audio output device 226 to output the generated sound. have. The MPU 221 has a program ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

Here, details of the RAM 223 will be described with reference to FIG. 9. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a reserved ball number counter 223a, a detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b, a time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c, a start winning prize counter 223d, a frame button operation effect flag 223e, a frame button operation number counter 223f, a pointer 223g, a timer counter 223h, and an elapsed time. It has at least a pitch pronunciation flag 223j and a pitch information memory 223k.

The holding ball number counter 223a is a variation effect (variation display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effect pending in the control device 110 up to a maximum of four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the pending ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp controller 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the reserved ball number counter 223a manages the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the number of balls to be held for the variation effect is added by the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and the value of the ball holding counter 203a is added in the main controller 110. When the number-of-holding-balls command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the value after addition of the number-of-holding-balls counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the number-of-holding-balls command (that is, the number is held in the main control device 110) The number of reserved balls of the generated variation effect) is stored in the number of reserved balls counter 223a (see S2007 of FIG. 25).

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the holding ball number counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110, and the third symbol is received in accordance with the reception thereof. When the variable display mode on the display device 81 is set, the value of the reserved sphere number counter 223a is decremented by 1 (see S2107 in FIG. 26). In this way, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is updated according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the value can be updated in synchronization with the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. ..

The value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the holding ball number counter 223a in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, or the holding ball number counter 223a in response to receiving the variation pattern command. At the timing of updating the value of, the display hold command is sent to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the hold ball count counter 223a after storage or update.

In the display control device 114, when receiving this display holding sphere number command, the value of the holding sphere number indicated by the command, that is, the holding sphere number pattern corresponding to the value of the holding sphere number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so as to be displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see S2951 of FIG. 41). As described above, the value of the pending ball number counter 223a is changed in synchronization with the pending counter 403a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the holding counter 403a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

The detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b is a counter for determining a variation mode (detailed variation pattern) of the variation effect to be started based on the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, and is the program ROM 222. It is used in combination with the detailed fluctuation pattern determination table 222a (see FIG. 6) provided in. Here, the detailed fluctuation pattern determination table 222a will also be described in accordance with the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b.

In the present embodiment, as the detailed variation pattern determined when variation A (variation time of 30 seconds) is instructed by the variation pattern command from main controller 110, no character is displayed during the variation time of 30 seconds. In addition to normal normal reach, a plurality of normal reach that a predetermined character is displayed while changing is prepared.

As a detailed pattern to be determined when the variation B (variation time 60 seconds) is instructed, a predetermined character is displayed during the variation time of 60 seconds, the rear image is displayed changing rapidly, etc. In addition to a plurality of super-reaches, a plurality of pseudo-runs in which a pseudo-variation is executed a plurality of times during a fluctuation time of 60 seconds are prepared.

As a detailed pattern to be determined when the variation C (variation time 90 seconds) is instructed, a predetermined character is displayed during the variation time of 90 seconds, the rear image is rapidly changed and displayed, etc. In addition to a plurality of special reach that are provided, a plurality of pseudo runs in which a pseudo variation is performed a plurality of times during a variation time of 90 seconds are prepared.

As a detailed variation pattern determined when the 2R variation (variation time 59 seconds) is instructed, a plurality of variation modes dedicated to the 2R certainty variation big hit with the variation time 59 seconds are prepared.

Further, for each variation pattern (variation A to variation F, 2R variation), a different detailed variation pattern is prepared depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a normal state, a time shortening or a probability variation state.

The detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b and the detailed fluctuation pattern determination table 222a are prepared for the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received from the main controller 110. It is used to determine one detailed variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed in response to the variation pattern command from a plurality of detailed variation patterns.

The detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b is composed of a loop counter, and its update is performed periodically (in the process of S1912 executed every 1 ms in the main process (see FIG. 24) in this embodiment). .. The detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b is updated by sequentially incrementing it by 1 within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in the present embodiment), and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (99). Further, the initial value “0” is set in the RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in the power-up process (see FIG. 23) executed when the power is turned on.

The detailed variation pattern determination table 222a includes various detailed information prepared for each variation pattern (variation A, variation B, variation C, 2R variation) notified from the main controller 110. The value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b is set in association with the fluctuation pattern. Further, the association between the detailed variation pattern and the value of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b is determined by the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in which the variation effect is performed (whether it is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the time saving state). Furthermore, depending on whether the symbol that is fixedly displayed in the variation effect is "big hit" or "off", it is associated with each variation pattern (variation A, variation B, variation C, 2R variation) separately.

When the MPU 221 receives the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, it reads the value of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b at that time from the RAM 223. Then, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal state, and it is determined that the jackpot is found from the variation type notified by the received stop type command, the gaming state is determined with respect to the variation pattern notified by the received variation pattern command. Is a "normal state" and the stop type is "big hit", a detailed fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b read from the RAM 223 is specified from the detailed fluctuation pattern determination table 222a. .. In addition, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a time saving state and it is determined that the variation type notified by the received stop type command is out of the variation pattern, the variation pattern notified by the received variation pattern command is changed to the gaming state. Is a “time saving state” and the stop type is “out”, a detailed fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b read from the RAM 223 is specified from the detailed fluctuation pattern determination table 222a. ..

The MPU 221 controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 based on the determined detailed variation pattern, and also instructs the display control device 114 to display the determined detailed variation pattern by the display variation pattern command. Notice. Then, the display control device 114 controls the variable display of the third symbol display device 81 based on the detailed variation pattern notified by the display variation pattern command. As a result, the voice output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the third symbol display device 81 perform the variation effect according to the determined detailed variation pattern.

When the variation D (variation time of 7 seconds) is instructed by the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, the detailed variation pattern of the mode in which the variation is completely disengaged after the variation time of 7 seconds is displayed on the pachinko machine 10. One is prepared for each gaming state. When the variation E (variation time of 10 seconds) is instructed, one variation pattern is prepared for each gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 for details of the mode in which the variation becomes completely out after the variation time of 10 seconds has elapsed. Further, when the variation F (variation time 55 seconds) is instructed, the pseudo variation by the pseudo-relation is performed 5 times within the variation time of 55 seconds, and the reach is completely lost without reaching the final details. One variation pattern is prepared. However, the variation F is instructed only when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal state, as described above.

Therefore, when one of the fluctuations D and E is instructed from the main control device 110, the MPU 221 prepares for each according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 regardless of the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223a. The determined detailed variation pattern is determined, the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled based on the determined detailed variation pattern, and the detailed variation pattern is notified to the display control device 114 by the display variation pattern command. When the variation F is instructed from the main controller 110, the MPU 221 causes the MPU 221 to determine the prepared detailed variation pattern irrespective of the value of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223a, and based on that, the voice The output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled, and the detailed variation pattern thereof is notified to the display control device 114 by a display variation pattern command.

Here, in the voice lamp control device 113, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the stop type indicated by the stop type command received up to that point (15R probability jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability jackpot, front-back deviation, front-back deviation). Other than reach, complete failure) and the number of fluctuations.

For example, in the stop type command corresponding to a certain fluctuating effect, if 15R certainty variation jackpot or 2R certainty variation jackpot is indicated as the stop type, the pachinko machine 10 of the pachinko machine 10 after the jackpot production after the variation production, until the next jackpot. It is determined that the game state is the probability change state. In addition, in the stop type command corresponding to a certain fluctuating effect, if 15R normal jackpot is indicated as the stop type, after the fluctuating big effect after the fluctuating effect until 100 times of fluctuating effect is performed, or next big hit. Until, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be a time saving state. Then, after 100 times of variable effects, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be the normal state until the next big hit.

The BGM playback flag for time saving 223c is used as background music (hereinafter referred to as "BGM (Back Ground Music)") used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state (hereinafter referred to as "time saving BGM"). Is a flag indicating that the reproduction is being performed. When the time saving medium BGM reproduction flag 223d is ON, it indicates that the BGM for time saving is being reproduced as BGM, and when it is OFF it indicates that the BGM other than the BGM for time saving is being reproduced as BGM.

The time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is set to OFF as an initial value in the RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in the startup process (see FIG. 23) executed when the power is turned on. Then, when the reproduction of the time saving BGM is started under the control of the MPU 221, the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is set to ON (S2148 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, when the reproduction of the time saving BGM is stopped by the MPU 221, the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is set to OFF (S2149 in FIG. 28).

In the present embodiment, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state, when a ball (start winning) into the first ball entrance 64 is detected, the player is informed that there is a ball. The sound of entering the ball is output from the audio output device 226. The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the output of the incoming sound is output in synchronization with the rhythm (beat) of the BGM for time saving.

Specifically, when the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is on, the MPU 221 determines that there is a ball in the first ball entrance 64 when it receives a reserved ball number command from the main control device 110, and for the first time Stock that information. Further, the MPU 221 manages the timing of the BGM for time saving for being sounded by the audio output device 226. Then, at the timing of the beat of the time saving BGM or at the timing of the middle (back beat) between the beats, the sound output device 226 produces the sound of the incoming ball corresponding to the stocked ball.

As a result, the incoming sound is sounded in time with the beat of the BGM for time saving, so that a sound with a sense of rhythm is output. Therefore, the player can play the game rhythmically by riding the rhythm of the BGM for time saving, which can enhance the player's feelings about the game. Therefore, the interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, the MPU 221 is stocked not only at the timing of the beat of the BGM for time saving but also at the timing of the back beat (the middle of the beat) when the balls are continuously entering the first entrance 64. The sound output device 226 produces the sound of the incoming ball corresponding to the incoming ball. As a result, a more complicated rhythm can be engraved by the incoming sound, which can further entertain the player.

Further, when the incoming sound is pronounced, the MPU 221 determines the pitch of the incoming sound based on the chord (chord) of the time saving BGM at the sounding timing. Specifically, one pitch is selected from the pitches of the constituent sounds constituting the chord as the pitch of the pitching sound. For example, when the chord of the BGM for time saving at the sounding timing of the ball entry sound is “C”, one of the constituent notes “do”, “mi”, and “so” of the chord is defined as the pitch of the ball entry sound. Select.

As a result, the incoming sound is not only pronounced in time with the beat of the time-saving BGM, but also at a pitch that matches the chord of the time-saving BGM at that time. Therefore, since the chord is composed of the incoming sound and the BGM for time saving, the player can hear a more pleasant sound. When the player continues to enter the first entrance 64, a melody accompanied by a BGM for shortening working hours can be formed by the entering sound, and can be heard by the player. Moreover, the melody differs depending on the timing of entering the ball and the number of entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with various melodies played by the incoming sound depending on the time.

Further, when the MPU 221 pronounces the incoming sound corresponding to the stocked ball in the same code in the time saving BGM three times in succession, the first incoming sound and the third incoming sound are , The pitch is selected from the constituent sounds, and the second pitching sound is a progressing sound that connects the first constituent sound and the third constituent sound in a scale. For example, when the chord of the BGM for time saving when the pitching sound is pronounced three times in succession is “C”, the pitch of the pitching sound of the first time is set as the constituent sound “do” The pitch of the ball sound is defined as the constituent sound "mi", while the pitch of the second incoming sound is defined as the elapsed sound "re". As a result, the three incoming sounds are sequentially pronounced in the order of “do,” “re,” and “mi,” in synchronism with the BGM beat of the chord “C”, so that the width of the melody played by the incoming sounds is wide. spread. That is, while the rhythm of the BGM is matched, the pitching sound is generated while inserting the pitching sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound between the pitching sounds whose pitch is the constituent sound of the BGM chord. As a result, it is possible to give variations to the melody by the incoming sound with the BGM for time saving. Therefore, the melody caused by the incoming sound does not become monotonous, and it is possible to perform a voice output that does not bore the player.

The starting prize counter 223d is a counter for counting the number of balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64, that is, the number of starting prizes. When the MPU 221 receives the number-of-holding-balls command transmitted from the main control device 110 when there is a ball in the first ball entrance 64, the MPU 221 adds 1 to the starting winning prize counter 223d to make the first ball entrance. The ball entering 64 is stocked (S2010 in FIG. 25).

When the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is on and the time saving BGM is being reproduced as the BGM, if the start winning counter 223d is a value of 1 or more at the timing of the time saving BGM beat, that is, If a ball has been stocked in the first ball entrance 64, a ball sound having a pitch of one of the constituent sounds of the chord of the time saving BGM at that time is generated at the timing of the beat (Fig. 29). As a result, it is possible to produce the sound of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 in accordance with the beats and chords of the time saving BGM, and allowing the player to hear a rhythmical and pleasant sound. You can

Further, when the value of the start prize counter 223d is 2 or more at the timing of the back beat of the BGM for time saving and the ball hit sound is generated at the previous beat, the code of the BGM for time saving at the timing of the back beat. On the condition that the chord of the BGM for time saving at the timing of the next beat is the same chord, a pitching tone whose pitch is the elapsed tone of the chord is generated (see FIG. 30). As a result, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 continuously, the ball entry sound is generated using the timing of the back beat of the time saving BGM, so that a complicated rhythm due to the ball entry sound can be engraved. it can. In addition, in the timing of the beats before and after, the pitched sound is pronounced with the constituent sound of the chord as the pitch, whereas in the pitched sound that is pronounced at the timing of the back beat, the pitched sound is the elapsed sound of the chord. Therefore, as described above, it is possible to give variations to the melody caused by the incoming sound.

The start winning award counter 223d is decremented by 1 when the incoming sound is generated (S2167 in FIG. 29, S2179 in FIG. 30). Further, the starting winning a prize counter 223d is initialized to 0 when the reproduction of the time saving BGM is started as the BGM (S2148 in FIG. 28). Therefore, it is possible to stock the ball that has entered the first ball entrance 64 during the reproduction of the time saving BGM by using the starting winning counter 223d.

In addition, when the value becomes 3, the start winning award counter 223d does not count the number of incoming balls even if there is a ball entering the first ball inlet 64 (even if a reserved ball number command is received). (S2009 of FIG. 25). That is, the number of balls entering the first ball entrance 64 is not stocked in excess of three.

In this pachinko machine 10, since the incoming sound is pronounced according to the beat (or back beat) of the BGM for time saving, when many incoming balls into the first entrance 64 are stocked, it is finally stocked. The sound of the incoming ball for the incoming ball is delayed from the actual incoming ball, causing a significant difference between the actual timing of the incoming ball and the sounding timing of the incoming ball, making the player feel uncomfortable. This is because there is a risk that they will be held. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, by limiting the stock of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 to three balls, it is possible to prevent the actual deviation from the timing of the actual sound of the ball entering and the sound of the ball entering from becoming noticeable. it can.

If the tempo of the BGM for time saving (the number of beats in 1 minute) is 160 BPM (Beats Per Munte), for example, since the number of balls to be shot is less than 100 in 1 minute, the time of 1 beat Therefore, it can be said that there is almost no possibility that more than three balls will be stocked in the first winning opening 64. Therefore, even if the number of balls entering the first ball entrance 64 is restricted not to exceed three, it is possible that the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 will not be sounded. In other words, the player does not feel uncomfortable because the incoming sound is not produced.

The upper limit of the stock number may be changed according to the tempo of the BGM for time saving, assuming that the number of spheres fired within a predetermined time is constant. For example, when the tempo of the BGM for time saving is 100 BPM, the number of beats per minute is smaller than when the tempo is 160 BPM, so the timing at which the incoming sound is generated is also reduced. Therefore, the number of balls to be stocked may be set to 4, for example. As a result, it is possible to generate the incoming sound for more incoming balls.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of stocks is determined for the entrance into the first entrance 64, and the incoming sound is generated, but the upper limit of the number of stocks may not be set. Good. In this case, as described above, when a large number of balls entering the first ball entrance 64 are stocked, the sound of the ball entering sound for the last stocked ball is delayed greatly from the actual ball entrance. As will be understood, the melody played by the delayed sound of the incoming ball allows the player to immerse himself in the afterglow of the entry.

The frame button operation effect flag 223e is a flag that indicates that an effect that requires operation of the frame button 22 is being performed in the variable effect that is performed by the third symbol display device 81. The effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 may be a big hit in the variable effect, for example, by causing the player to repeatedly hit the frame button 22 and displaying a predetermined character on the third symbol display device 81. Or when developing from normal reach to super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of super reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during normal reach to allow the player to select the effect mode of super reach. It includes production.

The frame button operation flag 223e indicates that the effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is performed when it is on, and the effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is performed when it is off. Indicates that there is no.

The frame button operation effect flag 223e is set to OFF as an initial value in the RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in the power-up process (see FIG. 23) executed when the power is turned on. Then, when an effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is started during the variable effect, the frame button operation effect flag 223e is set to ON (S2139 in FIG. 28). Further, when the effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is completed, the frame button operation effect flag 223e is set to OFF (S2141 of FIG. 29).

In the present embodiment, when an effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is performed in the variable effect, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, an operation that notifies that the frame button 22 has been operated. The sound is output from the audio output device 226. The pachinko machine 10 is configured to output the operation sound in accordance with the rhythm (beat) of BGM.

Specifically, when the frame button operation effect flag 223e is on, the MPU 221 executes the frame button operation sound output process (S2137 in FIG. 27), and the signal indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated is input. Then, first of all, the information is stocked. The MPU 221 also manages the timing of the BGM beats produced by the audio output device 226. Then, at the timing of the beat of the BGM or the timing of the middle of the beats (back beat), an operation sound corresponding to the stocked operation is sounded from the voice output device 226.

As a result, the operation sound is generated in synchronization with the beat of BGM, so that a rhythmic sound is output. Therefore, the player can play the game while rhythmically operating the frame button 22 while riding on the rhythm of BGM, and thus can raise the player's feelings about the game. Therefore, the interest in the game can be increased.

When the player continuously operates the frame button 22, the MPU 221 outputs, from the audio output device 226, an operation sound corresponding to the stocked operation not only at the BGM beat timing but also at the back beat timing. Pronounce. As a result, a more complicated rhythm can be created by the operation sound, so that the player can further enjoy the operation of the frame button 22.

In addition, the MPU 221 also determines the pitch of the operation sound based on the BGM code (chord) at the sounding timing, even when the operation sound is generated, as in the case of sounding the ball input sound during the time saving BGM reproduction. To do. As a result, the operation sound and the BGM form a chord while matching the rhythm, so that a more pleasant sound can be heard by the player. Further, when the player continues to operate the frame button 22, a melody accompanied by BGM can be formed by the operation sound and can be heard by the player. Moreover, the melody varies depending on the operation timing and the number of operations. Therefore, the player has a desire to operate the frame button 22 in various rhythms in order to listen to various melodies played by the operation sound depending on the occasion. Therefore, it is possible to give the player further enjoyment of the game.

Further, when the MPU 221 produces the operation sound corresponding to the operation stocked in the same chord in the BGM three times in succession, the MPU 221 produces the operation sound of the first time when the BGM for the time saving BGM is reproduced. For the sound and the third operation sound, a pitch is selected from the constituent sounds, and for the second operation sound, a progress sound that connects the first constituent sound and the third constituent sound in a scale is selected.

Thus, while the operation sound having the pitch of the elapsed sound is inserted between the operation sounds having the pitch of the constituent sound of the BGM code while adjusting to the rhythm of the BGM, the operation sound is generated. It is possible to give variations to the melody by the operation sound accompanied by BGM. Therefore, the melody due to the operation sound is not monotonous, and it is possible to perform the voice output that does not make the player tired.

In the present embodiment, it is assumed that an effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is not performed while the BGM for time saving is being reproduced. In other words, the operation sound indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated is not emitted during the period in which the ball input sound indicating the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is generated.

The frame button operation number counter 223f is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated by the player. When a signal indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated is input, the MPU 221 causes the frame button operation count counter 223f to display in the frame button operation count counter 223f in the frame button input monitoring/effect process (S1907 of FIG. 24) executed in the main process. Add 1 and stock the operation on the frame button 22.

Then, when the frame button operation effect flag 223e is on and the effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is performed in the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, the frame button operation ON output When the processing is executed (S2137 in FIG. 27) and the frame button operation count counter 223f has a value of 1 or more at the timing of the BGM beat, that is, if the frame button 22 has been operated, the beat At a timing, a process of producing an operation sound having a pitch of one of the constituent sounds of the BGM chord at that time is performed. As a result, the operation sound indicating the operation on the frame button 22 can be sounded according to the beat and chord of BGM, and the player can hear a rhythmical and pleasant sound.

Further, when the value of the frame button operation number counter 223f is 2 or more at the timing of the back beat of BGM and the operation sound is sounded at the previous beat, the BGM code at the timing of the back beat and the next On condition that the chord of BGM at the timing of the beat is the same chord, a process of producing an operation sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord is performed. As a result, when the frame button 22 is continuously operated, the operation sound is generated using the timing of the back beat of the BGM, so that a complicated rhythm can be created by the operation sound. Further, at the timing of the preceding and following beats, the operation sound is pronounced with the chord component sound as the pitch, whereas the operation sound pronounced at the timing of the back beat has the elapsed sound of the chord as the pitch. As described above, the melody by the operation sound can have variations.

The frame button operation number counter 223f is decremented by 1 when an operation sound is generated. The frame button operation count counter 223f is also initialized to 0 when the frame button operation effect flag 223e is turned on (S2139 in FIG. 28). Therefore, when the frame button 22 is operated during a period in which an effect requiring the operation of the frame button is being performed, the operation can be stocked by the frame button operation number counter 223f.

Further, the frame button operation number counter 223f does not count the operation even if the frame button 22 is operated when the value becomes 3. That is, the operation of the frame button 22 is not stocked in excess of three.

In this pachinko machine 10, since the operation sound is pronounced in synchronization with the beat (or back beat) of the BGM, when many frame buttons 22 are stocked, the operation sound corresponding to the last stocked operation is sounded. This is because the operation is performed with a large delay from the actual operation, and the difference between the actual operation and the sounding timing of the operation sound becomes noticeable, which may make the player feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, by setting the stock of the operation on the frame button 22 to three, it is possible to suppress the noticeable deviation between the actual operation and the sounding timing of the operation sound.

An operation detection invalid period may be provided for the operation of the frame button 22. That is, when the operation of the frame button 22 is detected, even if the frame button 22 is operated for a certain period (for example, 0.2 seconds) thereafter, the operation may be invalidated. As a result, even if the frame button 22 is operated once, it is detected that the frame button 22 has been operated based on the vibration or the like caused by the operation, and it is recognized as an operation different from the operation intended by the player. Can be suppressed. When the operation detection invalid period is provided, for example, when the operation detection invalid period of 0.2 seconds is provided, the frame button 22 is operated for at least 0.2 seconds even if the frame button 22 is repeatedly hit. Since the BGM tempo is 160 BPM (the cycle of one beat is 375 milliseconds), the number of operations of the frame button 22 stocked during one beat is at most two. Therefore, in this case, it is not necessary to set the upper limit of the stock with respect to the number of times the frame button 22 is operated.

The operation detection invalid period may be set according to the tempo of BGM. For example, if the BGM tempo is 120 BPM (one beat cycle is 500 ms), the operation detection invalid period is set to 0.25 seconds, and the BGM tempo is 150 BPM (one beat cycle is 400 ms. ), the operation detection invalid period may be set to 0.2 seconds. As a result, the number of operations of the frame button 22 stocked during one beat is at most two, so even if the upper limit of stock is not set, the operation sound is generated using the timing of the beat and the back beat of BGM. By doing so, when the frame button 22 is operated, the operation sound can be generated without delay.

The pointer 223g is for designating an address in which various control information to be acquired at a certain time is defined from a data table in which various control information to be executed in the voice lamp control device 113 is defined in time order. The data table is prepared for each effect whose execution is controlled by the voice lamp control device 113, and the data tables corresponding to all the effects are stored in the data table storage area 222b (see FIG. 6) provided in the program ROM 222. To be done.

When the MPU 221 determines the effect to be executed by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command received from the main control device 110, the MPU 221 reads out the data table corresponding to the determined effect from the data table storage area 222b. According to the read data table, the MPU 221 outputs audio from the audio output device 226, lights/flashes the lamp display device 227, and operates the first accessory 87 (the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation). Drive motor 87e) is controlled.

At each address of the data table, control information to be executed by the voice lamp control device 113 at the time indicated by the address is specified in order from the address “0001H”. That is, in the case of starting or stopping the reproduction of a predetermined sound at the first time, the information for instructing the start or stop of the predetermined sound is defined in association with the address corresponding to the first time. .. When the predetermined lamp is turned on in the second time, the information for instructing the lighting of the predetermined lamp is defined in association with the address corresponding to the second time. When the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is driven to lower the first accessory 87 by a predetermined step in the third time, the first accessory 87 is associated with the address corresponding to the third time, Information for driving the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is defined so as to lower the accessory 87 by a predetermined step.

The pointer 223g is once initialized to 0 when the effect to be executed is determined by the MPU 221 and the use of the data table corresponding to the effect is determined (S2147 in FIG. 27). Then, the MPU 221 adds 1 to the pointer 223g before reading the control information from the data table, and reads the control information corresponding to the address indicated by the pointer 223g after the addition in the data table. Then, according to the contents instructed by the control information, the voice output from the voice output device 226, the lighting/blinking of the lamp display device 227, the operation of the first accessory 87 (the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory). The drive of the rotation motor 87e) is controlled.

Here, when the MPU 221 determines the effect to be executed by the voice lamp control device 113 and then newly reads the data table corresponding to the effect, the MPU 221 starts the reading at the timing of the beat of BGM ( S2123 of FIG. 27). Also, when the control information associated with the address indicated by the pointer 223g is read out from the data table by counting up the pointer 223g (adding 1), it is also performed at the timing of the BGM beat. As a result, the audio lamp control device 113 starts or stops the audio output from the audio output device 226, lights and blinks the lamp display device 227, and operates the first accessory 87 (the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory moving motor 87a. The driving of the one accessory rotating motor 87e) can be started at the timing of the BGM beat.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, the sound output, the lighting/blinking of the lamp, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be increased.

Here, with reference to FIG. 10, an operation timing of the first accessory 87 in the case of performing one notification by the first accessory 87 will be described. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation timing of the first accessory 87. As shown in FIG. 10, when one notification is given by the first role object 87, the first role object 87 stored inside the upper side of the center frame 86 descends by 80 steps in time with the beat of BGM. Start. Then, when the lowering of the first accessory 87 is stopped in synchronization with the beat of BGM, the first accessory 87 is moved up and down a plurality of times with a width of 20 steps. At this time, stop/start of the rising/falling of the first accessory 87 is also performed according to the beat of BGM. Then, the first role object 87 is finally lowered to the maximum point position according to the beat of BGM, and the rotation of the first role object 87 is started at the maximum point position also according to the beat of BGM.

As described above, when the MPU 221 determines the effect to be executed by the audio lamp control device 113 and then newly reads the data table corresponding to the effect, the MPU 221 starts the reading at the timing of the BGM beat, and Since the control information associated with the address indicated by the pointer 223g is also read from the data table at the timing of the BGM beat, as shown in FIG. 10, for example, one notification of the first actor 87 is issued to the BGM. It can be operated according to the beat of. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game rhythmically.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the effect execution timing of the variable effect will be described. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing, as an example of the fluctuating effect, the effect execution timing in the case where the detailed fluctuating pattern is pseudo continuous.

The start of the variation effect is based on the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 when the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is not suspended, and When the ball is on hold, it is determined based on the ending timing of the variable effect or the jackpot effect that has been performed until immediately before, and it cannot be matched with the timing of the BGM beat.

In view of this, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 performs a display in which the third symbol is vibrated up and down until the timing of the original fluctuation start timing and the BGM beat timing (symbol swing period). Then, when the timing of the first BGM beat comes from the original variation start timing, reading of the data table corresponding to the detailed variation pattern determined for the variation effect is started at that timing, and , The third symbol display device 81 starts high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol.

The display pattern is set in advance so that the display of various effect images during the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed in synchronization with the beat of BGM. In addition, the output from the audio output device 226 of the sound corresponding to the display of the effect image and the lighting/blinking of the lamp of the lamp display device 227 are defined in the data table, and as described above, these are also stored in the BGM. It is performed according to the beat. For example, in the fluctuating effect by the pseudo-relation shown in FIG. 11, the chance up image indicating that the fluctuating effect is pseudo-stopped and re-changing is performed is output in synchronization with the beat of BGM. In accordance with this, sound output corresponding to the chance-up image and lighting/blinking of the lamp are also performed in accordance with the beat of BGM.

Furthermore, in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the timing of the beat of the BGM slightly before the original confirmed display is performed, and that it is stopped and displayed. The stop sound is generated by the sound output device 226. After that, the third symbol display device 81 displays the third symbol vibrating up and down until the original confirmation display timing comes (symbol shaking period), and the third symbol is confirmed and displayed at the original confirmation display timing.

In this way, the variation effect is originally started regardless of the BGM beat and is fixedly displayed, but in the present embodiment, the high-speed variation is started at the timing of the beat, and once again, Display a stop. Then, until the high-speed fluctuation starts from the original fluctuation start timing, from the time when the stop display is performed until the original fixed display timing comes, as the symbol fluctuation period, the display for vibrating the third symbol up and down is displayed. To do. Thereby, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect is started in synchronization with the beat of BGM, and it can be shown to the player as if the stop display was performed. Further, various effect images displayed during the variation effect can be displayed in accordance with the beat of the BGM, and further, the sound output according to the variation effect and the lighting/blinking of the lamp display device 227 can be performed by the BGM. It can be done in time with the beat. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player a feeling that the variation effect is performed in accordance with the rhythm of BGM, it is possible to perform a rhythmic game and improve the interest of the player.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. The timer counter 223h is a counter for counting the cycle of BGM beats. The MPU 221 uses the timer counter 223h to determine the timing of the beat and back beat of the BGM being reproduced. The timer counter 223h is initialized to 1 when the BGM reproduced by the audio output device 113 is changed and the reproduction of the changed BGM is started (S2146 of S28). At this time, the MPU 221 reads out the tempo (the number of beats per minute) of the BGM to be reproduced from the ROM 222, and calculates the beat cycle T (milliseconds) therefrom. The beat cycle T (milliseconds) is calculated by calculating 6000 milliseconds/(BGM tempo).

The tempo of the BGM is preliminarily defined in the ROM 222 for all the BGM reproduced by the audio lamp control device 113. Here, the tempo of each BGM is predetermined such that the cycle T of its beat is a multiple of 2 milliseconds. As a result, as will be described later, the timing of the BGM beat and the timing of the back beat can be easily determined only by performing the process of incrementing the timer counter 223h by 1 every 1 millisecond.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the tempo of each BGM reproduced by the audio lamp control device 113 is defined in the ROM 222 in advance. However, the BGM of all the BGMs is defined. The cycle T of the beat may be defined in the ROM 222 in advance. In this case, the beat cycle T of each BGM defined in the ROM 222 may be determined to be a multiple of 2 milliseconds.

After that, the timer counter 223h is incremented by 1 in the sound editing/output processing executed every 1 millisecond. However, when the value of the timer counter 223h matches the cycle T of the beat, "1" is set instead of adding 1. As a result, the timer counter 223h counts the cycle of BGM beats.

When the value of the timer counter 223h is T, the MPU 221 determines that it is the timing of the BGM beat and reads the control information associated with the address indicated by the pointer 223g from the set data table, and outputs the control information from the audio output device 226. Sound output, lighting/blinking of the lamp display device 227, and operation of the first accessory 87 (driving of the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87e). As a result, voice output, lighting/blinking of the lamp, and operation of the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of BGM.

In addition, when the time saving BGM is being reproduced as the BGM, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the timer counter 223h corresponds to the prize at the timing when the value of the timer counter 223h becomes T or T/2. Controls to generate winning sound. When an effect that requires operation of the frame button 22 is being performed, when the operation of the frame button 22 is performed, the operation is performed at the timing when the value of the timer counter 223h becomes T or T/2. Controls to generate a corresponding operation sound. Therefore, the ball entry sound and the operation sound are generated at the timing of the beat and the back beat of the BGM, so that the player can hear the ball entry sound and the operation sound that match the rhythm of the BGM.

The elapsed sound pronunciation flag 223j is a flag indicating that a ball entry sound or an operation sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord is sounded in the back beat of the BGM, and when it is ON, the elapsed sound is defined as the pitch. Indicates that a ball-entering sound or an operating sound has been generated, and when it is off, it indicates that a ball-entering sound or an operating sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound has not been generated.

The elapsed tone generation flag 223j is set to OFF as an initial value in the RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in the power-up process (see FIG. 23) executed when the power is turned on.

When the timing of the back beat arrives, the MPU 221 determines whether the number of balls entered into the first ball entrance 64 or the number of times of operation of the frame button 22 in which the ball entry sound or the operation sound is generated at the immediately preceding beat and stocked. When it is 2 or more, it is determined whether or not the BGM code of the immediately preceding beat matches the BGM code of the immediately following beat. The chord progressions are stored in advance in the program ROM 222 for all BGMs, and the MPU 221 can grasp the chords of the BGM beats according to the progress of the BGM reproduction.

Then, in this case, when it is determined that the BGM code of the immediately preceding beat and the BGM code of the immediately following beat match, the MPU 221 sets the elapsed sound of the chord as the pitch at the timing of the back beat. A ball sound or an operation sound is generated and the elapsed sound generation flag 223j is turned on. Here, at the time of pronouncing a ball entry sound or an operation sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound on the back beat, at least two or more ball entries or operation counts are stocked, as described above, so that even in the immediately following beat. , The sound of entering the ball or the sound of operation is always generated.

The MPU 221 refers to the elapsed tone pronunciation flag 223j when producing the sound of entering the ball or the sound of operation in the beat immediately after this. If the elapsed tone pronunciation flag 223j is turned on, a pitching sound or an operation sound whose pitch is the elapsed tone is produced at the timing of the back beat. A pitching sound or operation sound whose pitch is the constituent sound corresponding to the sound is generated. As a result, when a pitching sound or an operation sound whose pitch is the constituent sound is generated at the beat immediately after the elapsed sound of the back beat, a pitch deviating from the elapsed sound of the back beat is generated. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a strange melody from being generated when the incoming sound or the operation sound is generated while inserting the elapsed sound.

The pitch information memory 223k is a memory for storing the pitch produced when a ball-entering sound or an operation sound is produced at the timing of the BGM beat. When the MPU 221 determines the sound of the incoming sound or the operation sound at the timing of the BGM beat, the MPU 221 stores the pitch in the pitch information memory 223k (S2166 in FIG. 29).

Here, after a pitching sound or an operation sound whose pitch is a constituent sound of a chord is generated at a beat of a certain BGM, a pitching sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the same chord at the timing of the back beat of the following BGM. Alternatively, when an operation sound is generated and a pitching sound or an operation sound whose pitch is the constituent sound of the same chord is sounded at the timing of the beat of the next BGM, the pachinko machine 10 uses the back beat. The pitch of the note and the constituent note at the next beat is determined based on the pitch of the constituent note at the first beat. The correspondence between the pitch of the constituent sound at the first beat and the pitch of the constituent sound at the back beat and the constituent sound at the next beat is set in the program 222 for each possible chord in BGM. It is defined by the pitch setting table 222c (see FIG. 6) during sound reproduction.

For example, in the elapsed sound reproduction pitch setting table 222c, the chord “C” is associated with the constituent sound “do” of the first beat, “re” as the elapsed sound of the back beat, and the next beat. "Mi" is specified as the constituent sound of the first beat, and it is associated with the constituent sound "Mi" of the first beat, "Fa" as the elapsed sound of the back beat, and "So" as the constituent sound of the next beat. In this case, “fa” is defined as the elapsed sound of the back beat and “mi” is defined as the constituent sound of the next beat in association with the constituent sound “so” of the first beat. Corresponding to the chord “D” of the chord “D”, “Mi” is defined as the elapsed sound of the back beat and “Fa#” is defined as the chord of the next beat. In association with the constituent sound "Fa#" of the first beat, "so" is defined as the elapsed sound of the back beat, and "la" is defined as the constituent sound of the next beat, and the constituent sound of the first beat " In association with “La”, “So” is defined as the elapsed sound on the back beat, and “Fa#” is defined as the constituent sound on the next beat. In addition, the chord “F” is associated with the constituent sound “Fa” at the first beat, and “so” is defined as the elapsed sound at the back beat and “La” as the constituent sound at the next beat. , The corresponding sound "la" in the first beat, "shi" as the elapsed sound in the back beat, "do" as the constituent sound in the next beat, and the constituent sound " In association with "do", "shi" is defined as the elapsed sound of the back beat, and "la" is defined as the constituent sound of the next beat.

For example, when the MPU 221 has a chord “C” at a beat of a certain BGM, and when a pitching sound or an operation sound having a pitch of the constituent sound “Mi” is sounded at that time, the pitch “Mi” is generated. Is stored in the pitch information memory 223k. At the timing of the back beat of the subsequent BGM, when the pitching sound or operation sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the code “C” is sounded, the pitching sound or operation sound sounded at the immediately preceding beat from the pitch information memory 223k. Is read out (“Mi” in this example), and the pitch of the elapsed sound corresponding to the constituent sound “Mi” is specified from the elapsed sound reproduction pitch setting table 222c in the code “C”. In this example, "Fa" is specified as the pitch of the elapsed sound, and the ball-on sound or the operation sound having the elapsed sound "Fa" as the pitch is generated at the timing of the back beat.

Furthermore, also when the pitching sound or the operation sound having the pitch of the constituent sound of the code “C” is sounded at the timing of the beat of the next BGM after the back beat (that is, the elapsed sound sound generation flag 223j is on. In this case), the pitch of the ball input sound or the operation sound generated at the immediately preceding beat is read out from the pitch information memory 223k (“Mi” in this example), and corresponds to the constituent sound “Mi” in the code “C”. The pitch of the constituent sound at the next beat is specified from the pitch setting table 222c during reproduction of the elapsed sound. In this example, "so" is specified as the pitch of the constituent sound at the next beat, and a pitching sound or operation sound having the constituent sound "so" as the pitch is sounded at the timing of the next beat.

As a result, in each of the first BGM beat, the subsequent back beat, and the subsequent beat, the ball entry sound or the operation sound is generated in the order of “Mi”, “Fa”, and “So” corresponding to the BGM code “C”. It Therefore, in the case of a back-pit between the beat and the beat at which the pitching sound or the operation sound that pitches the chord constituent sound is generated, when the pitching sound or the operation sound that has the pitch as the elapsed sound is sounded. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a strange pitched elapsed sound or the generation of a pitch deviating from the elapsed sound generated by the back beat in the beat after the back beat. Therefore, a beautiful melody can be played when the incoming sound or the operation sound is generated while inserting the elapsed sound.

The RAM 223 also indicates a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed, and whether or not the variable display should be started. It has a fluctuation start flag (not shown) and the like. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 25) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed. The fluctuation start flag is turned on when the stop type command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S2004 in FIG. 25), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2102 of FIG. 26).

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 includes a main controller 110, a display controller 114, a voice output device 226, a first accessory vertical movement motor 87a, a first accessory rotation motor 87b, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like. Each is connected.

The sound output LSI 301 is a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) that is directly connected to the MPU 221, generates a sound to be reproduced based on an instruction from the MPU 221, and outputs the generated sound from the audio output device 226. A voice data ROM 306 is connected to the sound output LSI 301. The voice data ROM 306 is a memory that stores various voice data.

When the reproduction start command is set by the MPU 221, the sound output LSI 301 identifies a sound to be reproduced included in the reproduction start command, reads out audio data corresponding to the identified sound from the audio data ROM 306, and reproduces the audio data. A sound to be generated is generated, and the generated sound is output from the audio output device 226. Further, when the reproduction end command is set by the MPU 221, the MPU 221 specifies the sound to be reproduced included in the reproduction end command, and ends the reproduction of the specified sound.

The sound output LSI 301 has 16 channels of reproduction channels, and can generate a maximum of 16 sounds simultaneously, synthesize (mix) them, and then output them from the audio output device 226.

The data format stored in the audio data ROM 306 may be arbitrary. For example, it may be a data format in which a sound waveform is sampled by a linear pulse code variation method, or data compressed by various audio compression methods such as MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3) and AAC (Advanced Audio Coding). May be

Alternatively, a MIDI file that complies with the MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) standard for producing various sounds may be stored in the sound data ROM 306. In this case, the sound output LSI 301 includes a MIDI sound source, reads a MIDI file for reproducing a sound of a type instructed to be reproduced from the MPU 221, from the sound data ROM 306, and causes the MIDI sound source to sound according to the read MIDI file. Then, play the sound.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (fluctuation) (Production) and continuous notice production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 V supplied from the outside, and a voltage of 12 V for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 20).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 has at least an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input/output port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. doing.

The voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input/output port 238, and the display control device 114 issues a command instructing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 determined by the voice lamp control device 113 to the voice lamp control device. Received from 113.

The MPU 231, the program ROM 232, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are also connected to the input/output port 238 via the bus line 240. The video RAM 236 is connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a model having completely the same specifications as the symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model having a different winning probability for the jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

The MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the command input from the voice lamp control device 113. The program ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The program ROM 232 has at least a display data table storage area 232a and an additional data table storage area 232b.

The display data table storage area 232a is an area for storing a display data table prepared for each effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110. The display data table describes the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time in the effect corresponding to the display data table. The MPU 231 identifies the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, and reads the display data table corresponding to the effect from the display data table storage area 232a. Then, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled according to the read display data table.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described. The display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the voice lamp control device 113. For example, a variable effect, a demonstration effect, Display data tables corresponding to the fixed display effect and the restart effect are prepared.

In addition, the demonstration effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect was stopped, While the third symbol, which is the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9”, is stopped and displayed, only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the hall related person can recognize that the game is not being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

The confirmation display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the stop symbol is confirmed and displayed by receiving a confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 after the variation effect. It is a displayed effect. For example, when the stop symbol is a detached symbol, an effect of emphasizing the detachment is performed, and when the stop symbol is one of 15R probability jackpot, 15R normal jackpot and 2R probability variation jackpot, each jackpot is highlighted. The performance is performed. By visually recognizing the finalized display effect, the player can easily determine the game value given by the content of the stop symbol.

The restart effect is such that the predetermined position is set between the time when the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the effect that is indicated by the change pattern command and the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. It is an effect of displaying an image in which the third symbol is vibrated (swing) at the center on the third symbol display device 81. In the third symbol display device 81, the player visually recognizes that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the variation of the third symbol is stopped and displayed, and the stop symbol is not fixed at that time. Can be recognized.

One display data table corresponding to each of the demonstration effect and the restart effect is stored in the display data table storage area 232a. The display data table for change, which is the display data table for change effect, is prepared one by one according to the combination of the set change effect pattern and the stop design. In addition, as a display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect, one that definitely displays the out-of-place symbol as a stop symbol, one that definitely displays the probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot), and a normal jackpot (15R normal jackpot) ) To confirm and display are prepared respectively.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table for change in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The magnifying power is information for designating a magnifying power with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnifying power. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, one frame image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) As the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, light in the image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters and a character used for various effects such as a person and a character is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the rear surface image, the display position is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information and the filter designation information, with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, only the rear surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear surface image, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type is one of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (one of the “town stage”, “sea stage”, and “mountain stage”) selected by the player operating the frame button 22. Information for specifying whether to display or a rear image different from the rear images A to C is described. In addition, the back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image to display when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed.

When it is specified by the back surface type that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as a drawing target. .. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back side type is defined as the drawing content of the back side image in the display data table, but instead of this, the back side type and the state of the state corresponding to the back side type are described. Display state information indicating whether to display the rear image may be defined. The back surface image is displayed with the display range, brightness, and hue changed with the passage of time. This display state information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the display of the back image in the initial state. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the rear image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the initial state indicated by the display state information is displayed.

The display state information is information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing an image based on this display data table (or displaying an image based on this display data table on the third symbol display device 81). May be. In this case, the MPU 231 has started drawing the rear image to be displayed for that frame based on the display data table (or displaying the image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81). Based on the state of the back image displayed at the stage and drawing of the image (or display of the image on the third pattern display device 81) indicated by the display state information, based on the elapsed time Identify.

Further, the display state information is, depending on the back surface type, information indicating the elapsed time after the back image corresponding to the initial state is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the image based on the display data table. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display on the third symbol display device 81), or the type information of the display state information together with the back surface type and the display state information ( For example, it is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed, or the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 of the image based on the display data table). Information indicating whether or not it is information indicating the elapsed time from the start of (displaying) is started) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the display state information may be information indicating an address in which a rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Has a unique identification number assigned to the third symbol as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. In the present embodiment, each of the third symbols is given a unique identification number for identifying each. For example, "0" is attached to the main symbol as an identification number, "1" is attached to the main symbol as "1", and "2" is attached to the main symbol as an identification number. 2” is attached.

Further, as the symbol type information of the third symbol from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the identification information of the third symbol is not directly specified, but the variation effect performed immediately before is stopped. Offset information with the identification number of the design is described. This offset information is information representing the difference between the identification numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

The offset information is defined as the symbol type information of the third symbol from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the variation effect performed immediately before. This is because it changes depending on the stop design. Until the lapse of a predetermined time from the start of variation, as the symbol type information at each address, the identification information of the third symbol to be displayed at the time corresponding to the address and the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time ago Describe the difference (offset information) from the identification information. Thereby, the variation effect can be started from the stop pattern in the immediately preceding variation effect.

As the symbol type information, from the offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one time ago, the predetermined time when the identification number itself of the third symbol to be actually displayed is switched to is the third symbol at high speed. It is set so that the time is displayed in a variable manner. While the third symbol is displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 13) is the data table The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110. The selected display data table is read from the display data table storage area 232a, stored in the display data table buffer 233a (described later) provided in the work RAM 233, and the pointer 233c is initialized. Then, the pointer 233c is incremented by 1 each time the drawing processing for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233c, so that the image as specified by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 changes the program to be executed by the MPU 231 in accordance with the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Instead, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a.

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of complicated and enormous programs, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, which may limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode in this way, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. It can be created because the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance, based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The additional data table storage area 232b is an area for storing an additional data table that defines the display content of the effect to be additionally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for one effect based on the command from the main control device 110. is there. In the additional data table storage area 232b, an additional data table is prepared and stored for each additionally displayed effect.

Here, "adding to one effect" means changing the display content of one effect based on a command from the main control device 110, for example, an image that is not normally displayed in one effect. The concept of displaying and displaying another effect on top of that one effect, changing part or all of the color tone of that one effect, and changing the image displayed in one effect It includes.

That is, the additional data table is a drawing content necessary for additionally displaying an image that is not normally displayed with respect to one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main controller 110. Or the drawing contents necessary for changing a part or all of the color tone in the one effect, and the drawing contents required for changing and displaying the image displayed in the one effect Is.

Details of the additional data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the additional data table. In the additional data table, the contents (drawing contents) of the image for one frame to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address are specified in detail in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object to be additionally displayed in the image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

In the example of FIG. 14, in association with the address “0097H” defined in the display data table, the sprite type (character type: first role) is associated with one character (equivalent to the image of the character 1: movable actor). Object, second accessory, etc.), display position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. On the other hand, if there is no display object to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no display object to be added corresponding to the address in the additional data table. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address “0001H” in FIG. 14).

Note that the display content defined by the additional data table is, for example, for the variation effect displayed by the variation display data table selected based on the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) from the main controller 110. Display contents for displaying the notice effect image additionally displayed are defined by the additional data table.

Similar to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the additional data table, and the final address of the additional data table (in the example of FIG. 14, "00FDH" ") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the rendering content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the additional data table. Is listed.

When the MPU 231 receives a command from the audio lamp control device 113 and determines to additionally display the effect by the received command with respect to the effect whose display has been started previously, the MPU 231 corresponds to the added effect. The created additional data table is read from the additional data table storage area 232b and stored in the additional data table buffer 233b of the work RAM 233 described later.

Then, each time the pointer 233c is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c is displayed from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. After that, the image content to be drawn next is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later is created.

For example, in the example of FIG. 14, when the pointer 233g becomes “0097H”, the MPU 231 is defined in various sprites defined in the display data table address “0097H” and in the additional data table address “0097H”. The drawing list is created by adding the sprite of the character 1 and the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. On the other hand, when the pointer 233c is “0001H”, Null data is defined in the address “0001H” of the additional data table, so it is determined that there is no display object to be added, and the address “0001H” of the display data table is displayed. A drawing list is generated based on various sprites defined in “0001H”.

When the information defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the additional data table is "End" information, or when the pointer 233c indicates an address not defined in the additional data table (for example, In the example of FIG. 14, it is determined that there is no display object to be added even when the pointer 233c indicates an address after "00FEH", and drawing is performed based on various sprites defined in the display data table. Generate a list.

Then, by transmitting the generated drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content specified in the display data table is specified in accordance with the update of the pointer 233c, and the drawing content specified in the additional data table is added. The image as defined is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 should be displayed according to the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command or the like from the main control device 110. When another effect image (for example, an image imitating the first accessory) is displayed in addition to the effect image (for example, variable effect image), addition corresponding to the other effect image to be additionally displayed. By setting the data table in the additional data table buffer 233b, the effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed. Thereby, for example, when there are 32 types of original effect images and 2 types of other effect images to be additionally displayed, a display defining an image in which another effect image is superimposed for each original effect image is defined. If a data table is separately prepared, 32×(1+2)=96 types of display data tables must be prepared. As with the pachinko machine 10, a data table corresponding to another effect image is used as an additional data table. By separately defining, it is sufficient to prepare 32+2=34 types of displays and additional data tables, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the ROM 232. Therefore, it is possible to store a data table corresponding to various effect modes in the capacity prepared in the ROM 232, and it is possible to easily further diversify effect images.

Further, like the present pachinko machine 10, by defining another effect image to be additionally displayed as an additional data table, after setting the display data table corresponding to the original effect image in the display data table buffer 233a, Even when the display of another effect image to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to another effect image is added without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a. Only by setting in the data table buffer 233b, other effect images to be additionally displayed can be added to the original effect image and easily displayed.

Since the additional data table is configured to have the same data structure as the display data table, the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233b and the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233a are displayed. From the table, it is possible to easily specify the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer while updating the pointer 233c at each time, and to easily create one drawing list corresponding to one frame from these. Can be generated. Therefore, even in the case where the sound lamp control device 113 or the like determines the display of another effect in addition to the effect performed based on the command from the main control device 110, the effect to be additionally displayed is displayed. By defining the display content with the additional data table, a wide variety of effect displays can be easily performed from a small number of data tables.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. The work RAM 233 has at least a display data table buffer 233a, an additional data table buffer 223b, a pointer 233c, a drawing list area 233d, and a clock counter 233e.

The display data table buffer 233a stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 113. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the display data table corresponding to the effect mode in the display data table storage area 223a. And stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233a.

Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233c one by one, and on the basis of the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, the image controller 237 for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 15) in which the instruction contents of the image drawing are written is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The additional data table buffer 233b is displayed in addition to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a according to a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 113. It is a buffer for storing an additional data table corresponding to the effect. The MPU 231 writes Null data, which means that there is no display object to be additionally displayed in the additional data table buffer 233b, at the same time as storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233a. Clear the contents.

After that, the MPU 231 is based on a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 113, and in addition to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. If there is an effect to be additionally displayed by determining the presence or absence, an additional data table corresponding to the effect mode is selected from the data table storage area 233b, and the selected additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. Store.

Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233c one by one, and stores the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. Based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the additional data table, a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 15) that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 is generated for each frame. .. As a result, the effect corresponding to the additional data table is additionally displayed on the effect corresponding to the display data table on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the additional data table is not stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, Null data is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, so that the third symbol display device 81 has the effect corresponding to the display data table. Is displayed as is.

The pointer 233c is for designating an address from which the corresponding drawing content is to be acquired from the display data table and the additional data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. The MPU 231 initializes the pointer 233c to 0 once as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a. Then, in the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237, the pointer is set. The update process is executed (S2905 in FIG. 42, see FIG. 42), and the value of the pointer 233c is incremented by 1 (see S2981 in FIG. 42).

Each time such updating of the pointer 233c is performed, the MPU 231 selects the address indicated by the pointer 233c from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. By specifying the drawing contents specified in 1), a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later is created.

As a result, when the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, The effect corresponding to the additional data table can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Therefore, by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a or the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed. .. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

The drawing list area 233d is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 15, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, Design, 2,...), effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), character (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball count symbol 1, Reserved ball count symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described.

In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, the address where the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored is described, and the image controller 237 includes a character (described later) provided in the character ROM 234. The image data of the sprite is acquired from the memory area specified by the address of the storage area 234a. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read out from the ROM 234 is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification rate, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a semitransparency according to a semitransparent value. Processing, composite processing with other sprites according to α blending information, color tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing by the method specified by that information according to filter specification information An image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded in the video RAM 236 by the image controller 237.

The MPU 231 uses the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b to draw the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c and other images to be drawn. Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame, based on the contents of (for example, a held image displaying the number of held balls and a warning image notifying the occurrence of an error) ) Is generated and the detailed information is rearranged for each sprite to create a drawing list.

Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage address of the data of the sprite (display object) is the sprite type specified in the display data table and the additional data table, or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the character storage area 234a in which the image data of the sprite is stored is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 immediately determines the address where the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type. , And the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 displays a display data table and additional data regarding other information (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) in the detailed information of each sprite. Copy the information specified in the table as is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of the character (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2,..., Error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The clock counter 233e is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. The MPU 231 sets the time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233a. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. 32(b ) Each time the display setting process (see S2603, see FIG. 39) is executed, the clock counter 233e is decremented by one. As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233e becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a has ended, and performs the same when the effect ends. Performs various processes that should be performed.

The character ROM 235 includes a character storage area 235a in which image data of each sprite such as a design (background design or decorative design) displayed on the third design display device 81 is stored. In the character storage area 235a, the above-mentioned image data is stored in a compressed format in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In this embodiment, the image data before compression is composed of about 1024 Mbytes, and the image data of about 1024 Mbytes is compressed to about 768 Mbytes and stored in the character storage area 235a.

The video RAM 236 is a memory having a frame buffer area for storing two frames, which stores an image for one frame displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The image controller 236 generates image data for one frame according to the drawing list and writes the image data in one frame buffer area of the video RAM 236, and at the same time, the image data for one frame written in the other frame buffer area of the video RAM 236. Is read out, and the read-out image data is output to the third symbol display device 81 through the output port 239, whereby a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The image controller 237 reads the image data (compressed image data) of the sprite specified by the drawing list from the character storage area 235a in the order described in the drawing list, decompresses the image data, and then draws the image data. The processing is performed according to the drawing information defined in the list, and the image data of the sprite is written in one frame buffer area of the video RAM at the display position coordinates specified in the drawing list. Image data to be displayed in one frame is generated by decompressing, processing, and writing the image data for all the sprites defined in the drawing list.

The writing of one frame of image data to one frame buffer area and the reading of one frame of image data from the other frame buffer area are performed in parallel, and both are completed in 20 milliseconds. Then, when the reading of the image data for one frame from the other frame buffer area is completed, the image data for one frame previously written is read from the one frame buffer area, while the other The image data for the next one frame is written to the frame buffer area.

Thus, by alternately writing the image data and reading the image data in one frame buffer area and the other frame buffer area, a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 16 to 22. The process of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is regularly (in this embodiment, 2 msec cycle) started. There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process will be performed. The main processing will be described.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a regular process that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S1101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

Further, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are updated (S1103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 899, 99, 99, 250), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

Next, the processing for displaying by the first symbol display device 37 and the variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S1104), and then the first entrance The start winning process associated with the winning of 64 is executed (S1105). The details of the variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 17 and 19.

After the start winning process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S1106), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S1107), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated, and the ball is fired. Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the firing controller 112 to fire a sphere when the firing of the sphere is on.

Next, the variation process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing this variation process (S1104). This variation process (S1104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and controls the variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S1201). As the big hit, during the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of big hit, and during the predetermined time after the big hit game is included. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in the midst of hitting (S1201: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

If it is not a big hit (S1201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S1202), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S1202: No), then, after the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has passed (S1203). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S1203: No), the present process ends. As a result, the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1203, if the predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S1203: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the variable display reserved ball number N reserved in the main controller 110) Is greater than 0 (S1204), and the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (reserved ball number N) is not 0 (S1204: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (reserved ball number) N) is subtracted by 1 (S1205), and the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1206). This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the holding ball storage area 203c to the execution area side, and the holding first area→the execution area, the holding second area. The data in each area is shifted in the order of →holding first area, holding third area →holding second area, holding fourth area →holding third area. After the data shift process, the variation start process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1207). The fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S1204, when it is determined that the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (reserved ball number N) is 0 (S1204: No), the demonstration effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81, that is, It is determined whether or not the demonstration is in progress (S1208). In this determination processing, after the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113, until the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (reserved ball number N) is determined to be greater than 0. The period is judged as being in the demonstration.

If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S1208: No), a demo command is set (S1209), the present process is terminated, and if it is determined that the demo is in progress (S1208: Yes), This processing is ended as it is. The demo command set in the process of S1209 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 22) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits this demo command to the display control device 114 as it is, and the display control device 114 controls so as to display the demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with this demo command.

Here, as described above, the demo command is set when there is no holding ball when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation stop. Therefore, when the variable display is not started when the predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation stop, the demo command can be set and the demonstration effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether the changing time has elapsed (S1210). The display time during change of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and this change time elapses. If not (S1210: No), the display of the 1st symbol display device 37 is updated (S1211), and this processing is ended.

In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the variation time elapses after the variation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned off. And a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

The variation process is executed every 2 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 200, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S1210: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1212). The stop symbol is set in advance by a fluctuation start process (S1207) described later with reference to FIG. That is, by the process of S1206, whether or not it is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved sphere storage area 203c, and when it is a big hit, the first winning type. Depending on the value of the counter C2 15R probability variation jackpot after the jackpot (probability variation jackpot that the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 rounds jackpot) or 2R probability variation jackpot (the maximum round number is a high probability state after two rounds jackpot) It is determined whether it is a symbol that is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to) or a symbol that is a 15R normal jackpot (a jackpot that shifts to a low-probability state after the jackpot of maximum 15 rounds).

In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on when the 15R probability variation jackpot is hit after the jackpot, the red LED is turned on when the 2R probability variation jackpot is hit, and the red LED and the blue color when the 15R regular jackpot is hit. Turn on the LED and. Further, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The LED display is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change is stopped.

When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S1212, the stop symbol of the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED on the first symbol display device 37. Then, a confirmation command is set to confirm (S1213), and this processing ends. Upon receiving this confirmation command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 114 as it is. The third symbol display device 81 stops the variation when the variation time elapses, and by receiving the confirmation command, the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

Next, the fluctuation start process (S1207) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process (S1207). This variation start processing (S1207) is executed in the variation processing (see FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16) and is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c. , "Big hit" or "off" lottery (judgment determination) is performed, and the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

In the variation start process, first, a lottery (win/win determination) process for determining whether or not it is a big hit based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c (S1301). Whether or not a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the game state at that time. As described above, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the low probability state, "7,307,582" associated with the "low probability state" in the big hit random number table 202a becomes the big hit random number value, and the pachinko machine is a big hit random number value. When the 10 gaming states are high probability states, "28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, which are associated with the "high probability state" in the jackpot random number table 202a. 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892" are the jackpot random number values. In the process of S1301, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved sphere storing area 203c is compared with these jackpot random number values, and when they match, it means that the jackpot is a big hit. Determine.

Then, as a result of the processing in S1301, if it is determined that the big hit (S1301: Yes), based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c, A display mode is set (S1302). In this process, the jackpot type set by the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202c, that is, the 15R probability variable jackpot in which the maximum round number shifts to a high-probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, or the maximum round number is 2. Display mode of the first symbol display device 37, based on whether the 2R probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after the jackpot of the round or the 15R normal jackpot that shifts to a low-probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds is the maximum round number ( The lighting state of the LED 37a) is set. Also, based on the transition state after the jackpot, the jackpot type (15R certainty variation jackpot, 2R certainty variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) stop type to stop and display the jackpot symbols corresponding to various jackpots on the third symbol display device 81. Is set as.

Next, the variation pattern (variation time) at the time of a big hit is determined (S1303). This fluctuation pattern is determined based on the jackpot type set in the process of S1302, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202c. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1303, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set.

When it is determined in the process of S1301 that the jackpot is not the big hit (S1301: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S1304). In the process of S1304, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the deviation symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c. As the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a front/rear outreach, a reach other than the front/rear outreach, or a complete outreach is set. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set such that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs depending on whether the state is the high probability state or the low probability state. There is.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S1305). This variation pattern is determined by the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is a high-probability state, a short-time medium state, or a low-probability state other than medium-time period), the stop type set in the process of S1302, and the variation type counter CS1. And the deviation pattern table for deviation 202d. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1305, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set.

When the processing of S1303 or the processing of S1305 is finished, the variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern type determined in the processing of S1303 or S1305 is set (S1306). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S1302 or S1304 is set (S1307). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 22). It

Next, with reference to a flowchart of FIG. 19, a start winning process (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S1105). This start winning process (S1105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball entrance 64, and if there is a starting prize. , Holds the value indicated by each random number counter.

When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball inlet 64 (starting prize) (S1401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S1401: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number N of balls for the variable effect suspended in the main controller 110) is It is determined whether it is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1402). Whether there is no winning in the first ball entrance 64 (S1401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64, if the number N of operation-holding balls is not N<4 (S1402: No) , Return to timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first ball entrance 64 (S1401: Yes) and the number of reserved balls N<4 (S1402: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N) is set. 1 is added (S1403), and the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 updated in step S1103 are added to the free hold area of the hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The first area is stored in the first area (S1404).

Next, a holding ball number command including the holding ball number N updated by the processing of S1403 is created (S1405), the created holding ball number command is set (S1406), the start winning process is ended, and the timer allocation is completed. Return to included processing. This reserved ball number command is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1701 of the main processing (FIG. 22). The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls in the voice lamp control device 113 based on the number of holding balls N included in the holding ball number command.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1501), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 311, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1601). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Next, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1604), and if it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1611. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if it is not stored (S1605: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S1611 in this case as well.

If the power failure information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, the process proceeds to S1611. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1712 in FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S1611, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1611). Upon receipt of this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears areas (work areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and is ready to start payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1612, S1613) of RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup process, the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S1612, S1613) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S1612, S1613), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1612), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1613). After the initialization processing of the RAM 203 is executed, the processing shifts to S1610.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored (S1605: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S1607: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S1608). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the payout control device 111 to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1610, the interrupt is permitted (S1610). Then, the process shifts to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As its outline, each processing of S1701 to S1705 is executed as a regular processing of a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of S1708 and S1709 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). ) Is executed (S1701). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S1101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 16) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the number-of-holding-balls command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 19) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command and the like necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer 203b of the RAM 203.

When the change type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703), and then, in the case of the jackpot state, the specific winning opening of the variable winning device 65 (large opening) A large opening opening/closing process for opening or closing the mouth 65a is executed (S1704). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, a symbol of "O" or "x") by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1705). Briefly described, on condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 The variable display of the second symbol is carried out. Then, the lottery for the second symbol is carried out by the value of the second hit random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is hit, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706). If the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S1707). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1707: Yes), the process proceeds to S1701 and the above-described processes after S1701 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main processing (S1707: No), during the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1708, S1709).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1708). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 or 250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer 203b of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1702 (S1709).

Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1701 to S1705 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the processing of S1706, if the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 20 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1710 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1710), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1711). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1712), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1713), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

Note that the processing of S1706 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1701 to S1705 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1708 and S1709 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the startup process is completed. The process can be started from S1701. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1701 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup processing. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the process when the power is shut down, the stack pointer is not changed in the initialization process (S1601). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1701 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 32. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

First, referring to FIG. 23, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1801). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1918 (see FIG. 24) is caused by the instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the current startup processing It is determined whether or not it was started during the execution of () (S1802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 24, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1915 in FIG. 24), the power-off process in S1918 is executed. The power-off processing in-progress flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing in-progress flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1918 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1802: No), the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off in S1918 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1803).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1806. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction of the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1803: Yes), the process proceeds to S1804 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1803: No), the process proceeds to S1808.

If the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power shutdown). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1803: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1804. On the other hand, this startup processing is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1918 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1803: No), and the process proceeds to S1808.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1802: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1918, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, and therefore the process proceeds to S1804, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1804, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1804). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, and it is confirmed whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1805: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1806). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

In the process of S1808, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S1808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1918 is executed (see S1917 in FIG. 24). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1918 is executed, the process of S1808 with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S1918 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1809), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1810), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1811), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1808 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the startup process this time was started after the power was completely cut off, for example, and the process of S1804 to S1806 is followed by the process of S1808. This is a case where processing has been started or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset by noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) and started. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1809, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1810, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1810), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1811), the process proceeds to the main process.

It should be noted that the clear processing of S1809 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1804 when the processing of S1808 is reached via the processing of S1804 to S1806. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the process of S1901 was executed last time (S1901), and if 1 msec or more has not elapsed (S1901: No), S1902 The process proceeds to S1913 without performing the process of S1911.

In the processing of S1901, it is the processing relating to the setting of the display, the sound, and the operation of the first accessory 87 (that is, the setting of the effect) that determines whether or not 1 msec has elapsed in a short cycle ( This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display process of S1913 and the command determination process of S1914 in a short cycle, while it is not necessary to edit within 1 msec. By executing the process of S1914 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1913 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to perform the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

After the start-up process, when the process of S1901 is executed for the first time after the execution of the main process is started, the process directly proceeds to S1902 without determining whether 1 millisecond or more has elapsed. Alternatively, when the processing of S1901 is executed for the first time after the execution of the main processing is started after the start-up processing, it may be possible to shift to the processing of S1902 assuming that 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S1901.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1901 (S1901: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1903 to S1914 are transmitted to the display control device 114. Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1909 described later (S1903), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1904). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not when the power is turned on, the process proceeds to S1907 without performing the power-on notification process.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1907). In this frame button input monitoring/production process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the production effect is monitored and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this processing, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

Further, when the frame effect is pressed while the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the process of changing the stage is performed, and the back image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image changing command, the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is changed to an image corresponding to the stage. The process of changing to.

In addition, when the preview character appears at the start of the variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this change, or by pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production, the expectation for the jackpot is displayed. It is also possible to change to an effect that can be held or to use the frame button 22 as an enter button for selecting one reach effect from among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1907 is omitted.

Further, in the case where an effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is performed in the variable effect, the process of counting the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated using the frame button operation number counter 223f also monitors the frame button input. -It is performed in the production process. As a result, the fact that the frame button 22 has been operated is stocked by the frame button operation count 223f. The operation of the frame button 22 stocked here is used to output an operation sound for notifying that the frame button 22 has been operated, in synchronization with the beat of BGM.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process (S1907) is finished, a sound editing/output process is then executed (S1908). In the sound editing/output process, a sound is output according to the data table corresponding to the effect set by the command from the main controller 110, and according to the entry status into the first entrance 64 or the operation status of the frame button 22. The sound output from the output device 226 is specified, the sound output LSI 301 is controlled, and a process of outputting various sounds from the sound output device 226 is executed. Details of the sound editing/output processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28.

Next, a ramp edit process is executed (S1909). In the lamp editing process, according to the data table corresponding to the effect set by the command from the main control device 110, and according to the entry situation into the first entry slot 64 or the operation situation of the frame button 22, the third symbol The lighting patterns and the like of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the display device 81.

Next, the first accessory edit drive process is executed (S1910). In the first accessory edit drive process, the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87e are drive-controlled in accordance with the data table corresponding to the effect set by the command from the main controller 110. The first accessory 87 is operated to execute the notice effect by the first accessory 87.

After the processing of S1910, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1911), then the counter updating processing is executed (S1912), and the processing proceeds to S1913. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S1909 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Further, the sound editing/output processing of S1908 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the counter update process, various counters provided in the RAM 223 are updated. For example, the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b is updated in this counter updating process. The detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b is updated by sequentially incrementing it by 1 within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in the present embodiment), and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (99).

In the process of S1913, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. A variable display process, which is a process of temporarily storing for transmission, is executed. Details of this variable display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variable display process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1914). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S1914 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1915). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1915 (S1915: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S1917), and the power-off process is executed (S1918). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S1919), and then the processing is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1915 (S1915: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1916), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1916: No), the process returns to S1901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1916: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes.

Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Further, the sound output from the sound output device 226 does not change, and the lighting/blinking of the lamp of the lamp display device 227 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he can call a clerk in the hall or the like to request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, a command determination process (S1914) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1914). This command determination process (S1914) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 24) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .. In addition, this process also determines the start of the continuous notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 when the number of reserved balls command is received from the main control device 110.

In the command determination process, first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not (S2001). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command is received (S2001: Yes), the fluctuation pattern type (any of fluctuations A to F and 2R fluctuation) is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S2002), and the process returns to the main process. ..

The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in a variation display process (see FIG. 26) described later, a detailed variation pattern is determined based on the stored variation pattern type. Then, the detailed variation pattern determined here is notified to the display control device 114 by the display variation pattern command, and the variation effect is produced on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the notified detailed variation pattern. Done.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S2001: No), then it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2003). When it is determined that the stop type command is received (S2003: Yes), the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2004), and the stop type indicated by the stop type command is extracted, It is stored in the RAM 223 (S2005).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S2003: No), then it is determined whether or not a reserve ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2006). Then, when it is determined that the hold ball number command is received (S2006: Yes), the value of the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the hold ball number command (that is, held by the main control device 110). The variable effect holding ball number) is extracted and stored in the holding ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2007).

Here, since the number of reserved balls command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), every time there is a start prize, the process of S2008 is executed. The value of the reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp controller 113 can be matched with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, even if the value of the holding ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the voice lamp control device 113 of the voice lamp control device 113 detects the start winning. The value of the reserved ball number counter 223a can be modified to match the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110.

Further, after the processing of S2007, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a updated by the processing of S2007 is set (S2008). Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, it is determined whether or not the start prize counter 223d is 3 (S2009). If the start prize counter 223d is not 3 (S2009: No), 1 is added to the start prize counter 223d (S2010), and the process returns to the main process. .. If the start winning award counter 223d is 3 (S2009: Yes), the process of S2010 is skipped and the process returns to the main process.

By the process of S2010, 1 is added to the start winning prize counter 223d in accordance with the reception of the number of reserved balls command. Since the number of reserved balls command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 when there is a ball entering the first ball entrance 64, the starting winning counter 223d causes the first winning ball counter 223d to enter the first ball entrance 64. This means that the number of (starting prizes) is being counted. In other words, the voice lamp control device 113 stocks the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 by the starting prize counter 223d.

When the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is turned on and the time saving BGM is reproduced as the BGM, the stocked ball into the first entrance 64 is stocked at the beat timing of the time saving BGM. , Is used to generate a pitching sound having a pitch as one of the constituent sounds of the chord of the time saving BGM at that time. As a result, the ball that indicates the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is pronounced in accordance with the beat and chord of the time saving BGM, so that the player can hear a rhythmical and pleasant sound. ..

In addition, when the number of the balls entered into the first winning hole counter 223d in the starting winning award counter 223d is 3 according to the determination in S2009, the starting winning award counter 223d causes the first winning hole 64 to enter the first winning hole 64. Even if the balls are not stocked and there is a ball in the first ball entrance 64, the ball is invalid in terms of counting by the starting prize counter 223d.

In this pachinko machine 10, since the incoming sound is pronounced according to the beat (or back beat) of the BGM for time saving, when many incoming balls into the first entrance 64 are stocked, it is finally stocked. The sound of the incoming ball for the incoming ball is delayed from the actual incoming ball, causing a significant difference between the actual timing of the incoming ball and the sounding timing of the incoming ball, making the player feel uncomfortable. This is because there is a risk that they will be held. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, by limiting the stock of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 to three balls, it is possible to prevent the actual deviation from the timing of the actual sound of the ball entering and the sound of the ball entering from becoming noticeable. it can.

If the tempo of the BGM for time saving (the number of beats in 1 minute) is 160 BPM (Beats Per Munte), for example, since the number of balls to be shot is less than 100 in 1 minute, the time of 1 beat Therefore, there is almost no possibility that more than three balls will enter the first winning opening 64. Therefore, even if the number of balls entering the first ball entrance 64 is restricted not to exceed three, it is possible that the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 will not be sounded. In other words, the player does not feel uncomfortable because the incoming sound is not produced.

As a result of the processing in S2006, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing according to the received command is executed. (S2011), the process proceeds to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114. The demo command and the confirmation command received from the main control device 110 are set as the display demo command and the display confirmation command by the process of S2011, and are transmitted to the display control device 114.

Next, the variable display processing (S1913) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this variable display processing (S1913).

This fluctuation display process (S1913) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the fluctuation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In order to do so, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and a display stop type for transmitting the stop type extracted from the stop type command to the display control device 114. This is a process of generating a command. In addition, the value of the reserved sphere number counter 223a is updated along with the display of the variation effect, and the display reserved sphere number command is set in order to notify the display control device 114 of the updated reserved sphere number.

In the fluctuation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2101). If it is determined that the variation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S2101: No), it means that the variation pattern command and the stop type command are not received from the main control device 110. The variable display process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S2101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S2102), and then extracted from the fluctuation pattern command in the process of S2002 of the command determination process (see FIG. 25). The variation pattern type (any of the variations A to F and 2R variation) in the generated variation effect and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command in the process of S2005 are acquired from the RAM 223 (S2103).

Then, the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b is read out, the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b, the fluctuation pattern type and the stop type acquired in the process of S2103, and the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (normal state, The detailed variation pattern is determined based on the probability variation state or the time saving state) and the detailed variation pattern determination table 222a (S2104).

The fluctuation pattern type notified from the main control device 110 by the fluctuation pattern command defines only the fluctuation time, but by this S2104, 1 out of various detailed fluctuation patterns prepared for the fluctuation time One fluctuation pattern is selected, and the selected fluctuation pattern is determined as the detailed fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect to be executed.

In addition, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a stop type indicated by the stop type command received up to that point (15R probability jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability jackpot, front-rear reach, non-front-reach reach, complete disconnection), It can be judged based on the number of fluctuations.

For example, in the stop type command corresponding to a certain fluctuating effect, if 15R certainty variation jackpot or 2R certainty variation jackpot is indicated as the stop type, the pachinko machine 10 of the pachinko machine 10 after the jackpot production after the variation production, until the next jackpot. It is determined that the game state is the probability change state. In addition, in the stop type command corresponding to a certain fluctuating effect, if 15R normal jackpot is indicated as the stop type, after the fluctuating big effect after the fluctuating effect until 100 times of fluctuating effect is performed, or next big hit. Until, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be a time saving state. Then, after 100 times of variable effects, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be the normal state until the next big hit.

In addition, the ending command transmitted from the main control device 110 at the end of the jackpot (command for performing an effect indicating the end of the jackpot) includes the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after the jackpot (whether it is a probable variation state or a time saving state). The voice lamp control device 113 may determine the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 from the gaming state included in this ending command. At this time, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after the jackpot included in the ending command is a time-saving state, the time period until the variation effect is performed 100 times is set as a time-saving state, and then until the next jackpot. Judge as normal.

When the detailed variation pattern is determined in the process of S2104, a display variation pattern command for notifying the determined detailed variation pattern to the display control device 114 is then generated, and the command is displayed. The data is temporarily stored in the RAM 223 for transmission to (S2105). In addition, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type acquired by the processing of S2103 is generated, and the command is temporarily stored in the RAM 223 for transmission to the display control device 114. (S2106).

In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, the variation pattern of the third symbol is displayed in the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started. Further, in the display control device 114, when receiving the display stop type command, the stop symbol that matches the stop type is selected, and when the variation effect started by the display variation pattern command is confirmed and displayed, Display the selected stop design.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command generated by the processing of S2105 and S2106 are not immediately transmitted to the display control device 114, but are being reproduced. Is transmitted at the timing of the beat. The timing for starting the variation effect is determined by the control of main controller 110 regardless of the rhythm of the BGM output by voice lamp controller 113.

However, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display variation pattern command generated by receiving the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 at the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced. Therefore, the variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 by the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is started in synchronization with the timing of the BGM beat.

Further, in the display control device 114, in the variable display of the third symbol, various characters are made to appear in accordance with the cycle of the beat of BGM, an effect image is displayed, a pseudo stop is performed, and the final display is made. The display data table and the additional data table are defined so that the temporary stop display is performed.

Therefore, by starting the variable display of the third symbol in synchronization with the timing of the beat of BGM, various characters appear, effect images are displayed, pseudo-stops, temporary stop display before final display, etc. All are performed at the timing of the BGM beat. That is, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect is started in accordance with the beat of BGM, and can be shown to the player as if the stop display was performed. Further, various effect images displayed during the variable effect can also be displayed according to the beat of BGM.

Therefore, since it is possible to give the player a feeling that the variation effect is performed in accordance with the rhythm of BGM, it is possible to perform a rhythmic game and improve the interest of the player.

Next, with the setting of the display variation pattern command, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is decremented by 1 as the reserved ball is consumed (that is, the variable display corresponding to the reserved ball is set). (S2107), the display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the reserved ball number indicated by the value of the updated reserved ball number counter 223a is set (S2108). The display control device 114 executes a process of displaying the number of holding sphere numbers corresponding to the number of holding spheres indicated by the display holding sphere number command on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of held balls by counting the number of held ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the data table corresponding to the detailed variation pattern determined by the process of S2104 is specified (S2109). In the MPU 221, according to the data table specified here, the sound output from the voice output device 226 and the lighting/flashing of the lamp display device 228 are adjusted in accordance with the variation effect of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The operation of the first accessory 87 is controlled.

Then, a display variation start command for notifying the start of the variation effect to the display control device 114 is set (S2110), and the process returns to the main process. The display variation start command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the process of S1902 of the main process (see FIG. 24).

As described above, the display variation pattern command generated by the process of S2104 is not transmitted until the timing of the BGM beat, and in the third symbol display device 81, the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command is used. The variable display of the third symbol is not executed until the timing of the BGM beat. However, the start timing of the fluctuating effect is determined by the main control device 110 irrespective of the timing of the BGM beat, and the fluctuating pattern command instructing the start of the fluctuating effect is transmitted from the main control device 110. Then, in the third symbol display device 81, the variable display of the third symbol must be started.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, the fluctuation start command for display is once transmitted to the display control device 114 by the process of S2110. The display control device 114 receives the display variation start command, and displays the variation of the third symbol up and down to start the variation effect. After that, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display variation pattern command to the display control device 114 at the timing of the BGM beat, so that the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command starts from the BGM beat timing. The variable display of the third symbol is started. This allows the player to see as if the variation effect was started in time with the beat of BGM.

Next, the sound edit/output processing (S1908) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. 27 and 28 are flowcharts showing this sound editing/output processing (S1908). As described above, the sound editing/outputting process is performed according to the data table corresponding to the effect set by the command from the main control device 110, the entry status into the first entrance 64, and the operation status of the frame button 22. In response, the sound output device 226 specifies a sound, controls the sound output LSI 301, and executes a process of outputting various sounds from the sound output device 226.

First, with reference to FIG. 27, when the execution of the sound editing/outputting process is started, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter 223h is equal to the cycle T of the beat of the BGM being reproduced (S2121). As described above, the timer counter 223h is a counter for counting the beat cycle T of the BGM being reproduced, and when the value of the timer counter 223h is equal to the beat cycle T (S2121: Yes), the BGM being reproduced is played. In step S2109 of the variable display process (see FIG. 26) or the like, execution of a new effect is determined according to a command from the main control device 110, and corresponding to the effect. It is determined whether the data table to be used is specified (S2122).

The data table is a table in which various control information to be executed by the voice lamp control device 113 is defined in order of time, and is provided after all the effects whose execution is controlled by the voice lamp control device 113. It is a thing.

In the process of S2122, when it is determined that the data table to be used is specified (S2122: Yes), the use of the specified data table is set (S2123), the pointer 223g is initialized to 0 (S2124), The processing moves to S2125.

The MPU 221 sequentially counts up the pointer 223g initialized in S2124, and various control information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 223g of the data table set to be used in the processing of S2123 is stored in the data table storage area. According to the control information read from 222b, the audio output from the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227 lighting/flashing, the operation of the first accessory 87 (the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation). The driving of the motor 87e) is controlled.

Here, since the setting of the data table to be used is performed at the timing of the beat of BGM, even if the effect to be executed according to the command from main controller 110 is determined at any timing, the audio output corresponding to that effect is output. The sound output from the device 226, the lighting/blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 can be started at the timing of the beat of BGM.

When the data table to be used is not specified as a result of the process of S2122 (S2122: No), the processes of S2123 and S2124 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2125.

In the process of S2125, it is determined whether or not there is the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command temporarily stored by the processes of S2105 and S2106 of the variation display process (see FIG. 26) (S2125). Then, if the temporarily stored display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are in the RAM 223 (S2125), the temporary storage display variation pattern command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114. (S2126) Also, the temporarily stored display stop type command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2127). Then, the process proceeds to S2128. The display variation start command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the process of S1902 of the main process (see FIG. 24).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command generated by the processing of S2105 and S2106 are not immediately transmitted to the display control device 114 but are reproduced. It is transmitted at the timing of the beat of BGM. Thereby, in the main control device 110, even if the start of the fluctuation effect is determined at an arbitrary timing, the fluctuation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 by the fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command, It can be started at the timing of the beat of BGM.

Then, in the display control device 114, in the variable display of the third symbol, various characters are made to appear in accordance with the cycle of the beat of BGM, an effect image is displayed, a pseudo stop is performed, and the final display is performed. The display data table and the additional data table are defined so that the temporary stop display is performed. Therefore, by starting the variable display of the third symbol in synchronization with the timing of the BGM beat, the appearance of various characters, the display of effect images, the pseudo stop, the temporary stop display before the final display, etc. Any of these can be performed at the timing of the BGM beat. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player a feeling that the variation effect is performed in accordance with the rhythm of BGM, it is possible to perform a rhythmic game and improve the interest of the player.

When it is determined by the process of S2125 that the temporarily stored display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are not in the RAM 223 (S2125: No), the processes of S2126 and S2127 are skipped and the process of S2128 is performed. Move to.

In the process of S2128, 1 is added to the pointer 223g (S2128), and then the control information defined by the address indicated by the pointer 223g is read from the data table set by the process of S2123 (S2129). The MPU 221 counts up the pointer 223g by 1 and reads the control information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 223g from the data table, so that this sound is generated based on the control information specified by the data table in chronological order. The audio output from the audio output device 226 and the lighting/flashing of the lamp display device 227 are performed by the edit/output process, the lamp edit process (S1909) of the main process (see FIG. 24), and the first accessory edit drive process (S1910). , And the operation of the first accessory 87 (driving the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87e).

Here, the processing of S2129 is performed at the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced. That is, the sound output from the sound output device 226, the lighting/blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are controlled at the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced. Thereby, in the pachinko machine 10, the sound output, the lighting/blinking of the lamp, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be increased.

Next, it is determined whether or not the control information read by the processing of S2129 includes sound reproduction start information (S2130). As a result, if there is sound reproduction start information (S2130: Yes), according to the sound reproduction start information, a reproduction start command including information of a sound to start reproduction is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2131), and the process proceeds to S2132. Transition. The sound output LSI starts the reproduction of the sound indicated by the reproduction start command based on the set reproduction start command, and outputs the sound output device 226.

In the process of S2130, if there is no sound reproduction start information (S2130: No), the process of S2131 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2132. In the process of S2132, it is determined whether the control information read by the process of S2129 includes sound reproduction stop information (S2132). As a result, if there is sound reproduction stop information (S2132: Yes), according to the sound reproduction stop information, a reproduction stop command including information of a sound to stop reproduction is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2133), and the process proceeds to S2134. Transition. The sound output LSI stops the reproduction of the sound indicated by the reproduction stop command based on the set reproduction stop command.

Here, in the control information read from the data table in the process of S2129, it is the sound other than BGM that the start and stop of the reproduction of the sound are instructed. In other words, with respect to sounds other than BGM, by the processing of S2130 to S2133, it is possible to start and stop the reproduction of sounds at the timing of the beat of BGM, and it is possible for the player to play a rhythmic game. It should be noted that the start and stop of the BGM sound reproduction is irrespective of the timing of the BGM beat, and at the stage when the BGM change timing is reached by the processing of S2143 (see FIG. 28) described later, the BGM that has been reproduced until then. Is stopped and a new BGM is started to be played back.

When it is determined by the process of S2132 that there is no sound reproduction stop information (S2132: No), the process of S2133 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2134. When the value of the timer counter 223h is different from the BGM beat cycle T by the processing of S2121, (S2121: No), the processing of S2122 to S2133 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S2134.

In the process of S2134, it is determined whether or not the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is on (S2134), and if the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is on (S2134: Yes), the start winning sound output process is executed (S2135). ). The start winning sound output process is performed when the time saving BGM is being played back as the BGM, the sound of the ball entering the first entrance 64 is notified at the timing of the beat or the back beat of the BGM. This is a process of generating one of the constituent sounds of the time saving BGM chord at the pitch. Details of the start winning sound output process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

In the process of S2134, when it is determined that the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is off (S2134: No) or after the starting winning sound output process (S2135) is executed, then the frame button operation effect flag 223e is turned on. It is determined whether or not (S2136). As a result, if the frame button operation effect flag 223e is on (S2136: Yes), the frame button operation sound output process is executed (S2137). In this frame button operation sound output process, when an effect that requires operation of the frame button 22 is being performed, the frame button 22 is operated at the timing of the beat or back beat of the BGM being reproduced at that time. The operation sound for notifying the fact is a process of generating one of the constituent sounds of the BGM code at that time at the pitch. The frame button operation sound output process is configured by the same process as the starting winning sound output process, and the details thereof will be described after the description of the starting winning sound output process.

In the process of S2136, when the frame button operation effect flag 223e is determined to be off (S2136: No) or after the frame button operation sound output process (S2137) is executed, then the process of S2138 shown in FIG. 28. Move to. In the process of S2138, it is determined whether the control information read out by the process of S2129 (see FIG. 27) includes the start information of the effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 (S2138). Then, if there is the start information of the effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 (S2138: Yes), the frame button operation effect flag 223e is set to ON, and the frame button operation number counter 223f is initialized to 0. (S2139). As a result, when the frame button operation sound output process (S2137) described above is executed and the frame button 22 is operated during an effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22, the operation sound is a BGM beat or backbeat. The process output at the timing is executed.

In the process of S2138, if it is determined that there is no start information of the effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 (S2138: No), or after the process of S2139 is executed, then S2129 (see FIG. 27). It is determined whether or not the control information read out by the process includes the end information of the effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 (S2140). Then, if there is end information of the effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 (S2140: Yes), the frame button operation effect flag 223e is set to OFF (S2141). As a result, the execution of the process of outputting the operation sound of the frame button 22 at the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat is completed.

In the process of S2140, when it is determined that there is no end information of the effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 (S2140: No), or after the process of S2141 is executed, then the value of the timer counter 223h is changed. It is updated (S2142). The timer counter 223h is updated by setting 1 when the value of the timer counter 223h is the cycle T of the beat of the BGM being reproduced, and when the value of the timer counter 223h is different from the cycle T, 1 is added to the timer counter 223h. As a result, the timer counter 223h can count the cycle of beats of the BGM being reproduced.

Here, the tempo of each BGM is predetermined such that the cycle T of its beat is a multiple of 2 milliseconds. As a result, the timing of the BGM beat and the timing of the back beat can be easily determined only by performing the process of incrementing the timer counter 223h by 1 every 1 millisecond.

Next, it is determined whether it is the BGM change timing (S2143). As the change timing of the BGM, for example, the timing of starting the reproduction of the BGM that is output when the big hit is notified and the notification of the big hit, the timing of starting or ending the reproduction of the big hit production BGM that is output during the big hit performance, and fluctuations In the effect, the reach effect is started, and there are a timing to start the reproduction of the reach effect BGM, a timing to end the reproduction of the reach effect BGM, and the like. These timings are grasped according to the control information defined in the data table set each time and the command received from the main controller 110.

If it is determined by the process of S2143 that it is the BGM change timing (S2143: Yes), the BGM designated by the control information of the data table or the BGM designated by the command received from the main controller 110 is designated. A reproduction start command is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2144). As a result, the reproduction of the designated BGM is started and is output from the audio output device 226.

Next, the tempo of the BGM of the type in which the reproduction is started is read from the ROM 222, the cycle T (millisecond) of the beat of the BGM is calculated, and stored in the RAM 223 (S2145). At this time, the beat cycle T (milliseconds) is calculated by calculating 6000 milliseconds/(BGM tempo). If the ROM 222 defines not the BGM tempo but the BGM beat cycle T (milliseconds) in advance, in the process of S2145, the BGM beat cycle of the type in which the reproduction is started is read from the ROM 222. You can put it out.

Also, the timer counter 223h is initialized to 1 (S2146). The timer counter 223h is updated while being counted up in the sound editing/output processing executed every 1 millisecond, and is counted up to the cycle T of the BGM beats calculated in the processing of S2145, whereby the MPU 221 By using the timer counter 223h, it is possible to grasp the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced.

Next, it is judged whether or not the BGM at which the reproduction is started is the time saving BGM (S2147), and if it is the time saving BGM (S2147: Yes), the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is set to ON (S2148), If it is not the BGM for time saving (S2148: No), the BGM reproduction flag 223c for time saving is set to OFF (S2149). As a result, while the time saving BGM is being played back as the BGM, the sound of entering the ball which informs the player of entering the first entrance 64 is confirmed by the processing of S2134 and S2135 (see FIG. 27). The start winning sound output process that is reproduced at the timing is executed.

After the processing of S2148 or S2149 ends, the sound editing/output processing ends and the process returns to the main processing. In addition, as a result of the processing of S2143, when it is determined that it is not the timing of changing the BGM (S2143: No), the sound editing/output processing is ended as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, a start winning sound output process (S2135) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. 29 and 30 are flowcharts showing the start winning sound output process (S2135). As described above, the starting winning sound output process is a ball entering for notifying the player of entering the first entrance 64 at the timing of the beat or the back beat of the BGM when the time saving BGM is reproduced as the BGM. In this process, one of the constituent tones of the chord of the time saving BGM at that time is generated at a pitch.

Referring to FIG. 29, in the starting winning sound output process, first, it is determined whether or not the winning sound immediate reproduction effect is being executed (S2151). Immediate winning sound reproduction reproduction means that, in the variable reproduction, instead of outputting the winning sound at the timing of the beat or back beat of the time saving BGM, if there is a ball entering the first entrance 64, This is an effect in which the incoming sound is output at a predetermined pitch without waiting for the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat, and is one of the notice effects that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is high. Whether to execute the winning sound immediate reproduction effect is determined based on the detailed variation pattern determined in the variation display process (see FIG. 26).

The player normally outputs a pitching sound having a pitch matching the chord of the time saving BGM in accordance with the rhythm of the time saving BGM, whereas the winning sound immediate reproduction effect is executed. By recognizing that the incoming sound deviates from the rhythm of the BGM for time saving, and is pronounced at a pitch of a predetermined pitch, it is recognized that there is a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the variation production, and interest in the game is enhanced. be able to.

When the winning sound immediate reproduction effect is being executed (S2151: Yes), it is determined whether or not the start winning counter 223d is 0 (S2152). If the starting winning prize counter 223d is 0 (S2152: Yes), there is no ball entering the first winning slot 64, and thus the starting winning sound output process is ended. On the other hand, if the start prize counter 223d is not 0 (S2152), it means that there is a ball in the first ball entrance 64, and therefore, a start winning sound reproduction start command with a pitch of a predetermined pitch is given. Is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2153). As a result, a winning sound having a predetermined pitch is output from the audio output device 226 without waiting for the timing of the BGM beat and the back beat. Next, the start prize winning counter 223d is decremented by 1 (S2154), and the start prize winning sound output processing is ended.

As a result of the processing of S2151, if it is determined that the winning sound immediate reproduction effect is not executed (S2151: No), then whether the value of the timer counter 223h is equal to the cycle T of the BGM for time saving or not. Is determined (S2155). As a result, when the value of the timer counter 223h is equal to the cycle T (S2155: Yes), since it is the timing of the BGM for time saving, the sound of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is generated. Perform the processing for. First, it is determined whether or not the value of the start prize counter 223d is 0 (S2156).

If the value of the start winning award counter 223d is not 0 (S2156: No), since a ball has been stocked in the first ball entrance 64, a process for generating a ball sound is executed. First, it is determined whether or not the chord is changed from the current beat in the BGM being reproduced (S2157). The progress of the chord of the time saving BGM is stored in the ROM 222, and the MPU 221 grasps the chord of the beat of the BGM according to the progress of the reproduction of the time saving BGM.

Here, the progress of the chord of the BGM for time saving stored in the ROM 222 is associated with the elapsed time after the reproduction of the BGM is started, and the code of the BGM from the elapsed time is defined. For example, the code "D" is associated with the elapsed time of 0 milliseconds, the code "G" is associated with the elapsed time of 720 milliseconds, and the code "A" is associated with the elapsed time of 1440 milliseconds. "D" is associated with the elapsed time of 2160 milliseconds, and the association ends. When the reproduction of the BGM sound is started, the MPU 221 monitors the reproduction elapsed time, and immediately after the BGM reproduction is started, the BGM code is "D" until the reproduction elapsed time of the BGM reaches 720 milliseconds. Until the BGM playback start time changes from 720 ms to 1440 ms, the BGM code is “G”, and the BGM playback start time changes from 1440 ms to 2160 ms. It is determined that the code is “A”. When the BGM playback start time reaches 2160 milliseconds, the BGM playback elapsed time is reset to 0 milliseconds after determining that the BGM code is "D", and the BGM playback elapsed time is again set. The BGM code at that time is determined while observing. As a result, it is possible to accurately grasp the chord progression for the BGM in which the same melody is repeatedly reproduced.

When the chord is changed from the current beat (S2157: Yes), a play start command for the incoming sound with the pitch as the root sound of the chord is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2159), and the process proceeds to S2166. The root note of the chord is the fundamental note in the chord. By the processing of S2159, the sound input device 226 outputs the incoming sound having the pitch as the root sound of the chord. When a pitch sound other than the root sound of the chord is output at the timing of the beat in which the BGM chord is changed, the player recognizes that sound as a sound that is out of the chord, and the player feels strange. May cause On the other hand, by letting the player enter a pitching sound with the root sound as a pitch, the pitching sound can be heard by the player as a sound that matches the changed chord. Therefore, it is possible to make the player hear a sound that is pleasing to the player.

As a result of the processing in S2157, if the chord is not changed at the current beat (S2157: No), then it is determined whether or not the elapsed sound generation flag 223j is on (S2160). As a result, if the elapsed tone pronunciation flag 223j is off (S2160: No), the chord information for the current beat is read from the ROM 222, and the pitch to be used as the pitch of one winning tone from the constituent tones forming the chord. Is selected (S2161), a reproduction start instruction of a winning sound whose pitch is the selected constituent sound is set in the sound output LSI (S2162), and the process proceeds to S2166.

As a result, a winning sound having the pitch of the constituent sound of the chord is output from the audio output device 226. Further, the incoming sound is not only pronounced according to the beat of the time saving BGM, but is also pronounced at a pitch that matches the chord of the time saving BGM at that time. Therefore, since the chord is composed of the incoming sound and the BGM for time saving, the player can hear a more pleasant sound. In addition, when the player continues to enter the first entrance 64, a melody accompanied by the BGM for time saving can be formed by the entering sound and can be heard by the player. Moreover, the melody differs depending on the timing of entering the ball and the number of entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with various melodies played by the incoming sound depending on the time.

As a result of the processing in S2160, when it is determined that the elapsed tone pronunciation flag 223j is ON (S2160: Yes), it is determined that the incoming sound having the elapsed tone as the pitch is produced at the timing of the immediately preceding back beat. This means that at the timing of the beat here, a ball-on sound having a pitch of a constituent sound corresponding to the sounded progress sound is generated. Specifically, the pitch reproduced at the immediately preceding beat is read from the pitch information memory 223k (S2163), and the pitch to be reproduced corresponding to the pitch reproduced at the previous beat with respect to the current BGM code. The pitch is selected from the pitch setting table 222c during elapsed sound reproduction (S2164). Then, the reproduction start command of the winning sound having the selected pitch is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2165), and the process proceeds to S2166.

Here, when a chord at a certain BGM beat is “C” and a pitching sound having a pitch of the constituent note “Mi” is sounded at that time, the note “Mi” is recorded as the pitch information memory. It is stored in 223k. At the timing of the back beat of the subsequent BGM, when the pitched sound having the pitch of the elapsed sound of the code “C” is sounded, the pitch of the pitched sound sounded at the immediately preceding beat is read from the pitch information memory 223k ( In this example, in "Mi") and the code "C", the pitch of the elapsed sound corresponding to the constituent sound "Mi" is specified from the elapsed sound reproduction pitch setting table 222c. In the present embodiment, "Fa" is specified as the pitch of the elapsed sound, and the ball-on sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound "Fa" is generated at the timing of the back beat.

Then, even when the incoming sound having the pitch of the constituent sound of the code “C” is sounded at the timing of the beat of the next BGM after the back beat (that is, when the elapsed sound pronunciation flag 223j is on), From the pitch information memory 223k, the pitch of the incoming sound generated at the immediately preceding beat is read out (in this example, "mi"), and in the code "C", it is composed at the next beat corresponding to the constituent sound "mi". The pitch of the sound is specified from the pitch setting table 222c during reproduction of the elapsed sound. In the present embodiment, "so" is specified as the pitch of the constituent sound at the next beat, and the ball-on sound having the constituent sound "so" as the pitch is sounded at the timing of the next beat.

As a result, in each of the first BGM beat, the subsequent back beat, and the subsequent beat, the incoming sounds are pronounced in the order of "mi", "fa", and "so" corresponding to the BGM code "C". Therefore, in the case of a back-pit between a beat and a beat at which the pitched pitched tone of the chord constituent tone is pronounced, when a pitched pitched tone of the elapsed tone is pronounced, a strange pitch It is possible to prevent a sound from being generated or a pitch out of the progress sound generated by the back beat to be generated in a beat after the back beat. Therefore, a beautiful melody can be played when the incoming sound is pronounced while inserting the elapsed sound.

In the processing of S2166, the pitch reproduced as the winning sound is stored in the pitch information memory 223k by the processing of S2159, S2162, and S2165 (S2166). Since one sound for entering the first entrance 64 has been generated, the start prize counter 223d is decremented by 1 (S2167). After that, the elapsed tone generation flag 223j is set to OFF (S2168), and the start winning sound output process is ended.

As a result of the process of S2156, when the value of the start winning award counter 223d is 0 (S2156: Yes), since the ball to the first ball entrance 64 has not been stocked, after the elapsed sound generation flag 223j is turned off ( (S2168), the start winning sound output process is terminated.

As a result of the processing in S2155, if the value of the timer counter 223h is not the BGM beat cycle T (S2156: No), then referring to FIG. 30, the value of the timer counter 223h is half the BGM beat cycle. It is determined whether or not it is T/2 (S2169). As a result, if the value of the timer counter 223h is not T/2 (S2169: No), the start winning sound output process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the timer counter 223h is T/2 (S2169: Yes), it is the timing of the back beat of the BGM being reproduced, so that the start prize counter 223d is larger than 1 and the beat immediately before. It is determined whether or not the incoming sound has been generated (S2170).

When the start winning prize counter 223d is 1 or less, or when the incoming sound is not generated at the immediately preceding beat (S2170: No), the starting winning sound output process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the start prize counter 223d is larger than 1 and the incoming sound is generated at the immediately preceding beat (S2170: Yes), then the chord information of the previous beat and the chord information of the next beat are stored in the ROM 222. (S2171), it is determined whether the chord information of the previous beat and the chord information of the next beat match (S2172).

As a result, when the chord information of the previous beat and the chord information of the next beat match (S2172: Yes), the pitch of the incoming sound reproduced at the previous beat is read from the pitch information memory 223k (S2173). A pitch to be reproduced for the current chord corresponding to the pitch reproduced in the previous beat is selected from the elapsed sound reproduction pitch setting table 222c (S2174). Then, a reproduction start command of the winning sound having the selected pitch is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2175). As a result, at the timing of the back beat of BGM, the winning sound of the pitch selected from the pitch setting table 222c during elapsed sound reproduction is output from the voice output device 226.

Here, while the pitch of the incoming sound output at the timing of the beat of BGM is the constituent sound of the chord, it is selected by the pitch setting table 222c during reproduction of the elapsed sound at the timing of the back beat of BGM. The pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord. As a result, when the balls are continuously entering the first entrance 64, not only the standard sound of the chord but also the back beat of the BGM is used to generate the incoming sound while inserting the elapsed sound of the chord. Therefore, a more complicated melody can be played by the incoming sound. Therefore, the interest of the player can be increased.

In addition, the pitch setting table 222c during elapsed sound reproduction determines the pitch of the incoming sound to be produced on the back beat of the BGM based on the pitch of the incoming sound to be produced on the previous beat, and The pitch of the incoming sound to be pronounced in beats is also determined. As a result, in the case of a back-pit between the beats in which the pitch-in tones that produce the pitch of the chord constituent tone are generated, a strange pitch It is possible to prevent the progress sound from being pronounced and a pitch deviating from the progress sound generated by the back beat in the beat after the back beat. Therefore, a beautiful melody can be played when the incoming sound is generated while inserting the elapsed sound.

Next, the elapsed sound generation flag 223j indicating that the elapsed sound has been generated is set to ON (S2176), and since the incoming sound corresponding to the incoming ball has been produced, the value of the starting prize counter 223d is decremented by 1 (S2179). ), the start winning sound output process ends.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S2172, when the chord information of the previous beat and the chord information of the next beat do not match (S2172: No), the chord information of the current BGM is read from the ROM 222, and the constituent sounds of the chord are read. One pitch pitch of the incoming sound is selected (S2177), and a playback start command of the incoming sound whose pitch is the selected constituent sound is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2178). If the progress sound of the chord is output here, the chord is changed at the next beat, so that the progress sound becomes a floating sound, and a strange melody is heard by the player. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the chord information of the previous beat and the next beat do not match due to the processing of S2177 and S2178, the pitch of the constituent sound of the chord in the back beat of BGM Since the sound is output from the voice output device 226, the player can hear a beautiful melody according to the code.

After the processing of S2178, the value of the start winning prize counter 223d is decremented by 1 (S2179), and the starting winning sound output processing is ended.

Now, with reference to FIG. 31 and FIG. 32, description will be made regarding the sounding timing of the incoming sound when the start winning sound output process is executed. First, FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the sounding timing of the incoming sound when the balls enter the first entrance 64 one by one during one beat of BGM. As shown in FIG. 31, in this case, the ball that has entered the first entrance 64 in the middle of the beat of BGM is stocked, and the incoming sound is sounded at the timing of the beat of BGM. At this time, at the timing of the first beat at which the chord is changed, a pitching sound having a pitch of the root sound (“C” in the example of FIG. 31) of the chord (“C” in the example of FIG. 31) is generated. Then, unless the chord is changed, a pitching sound having a pitch of the constituent sound of the chord (one of “do”, “mi”, and “so” in the example of FIG. 31) is sounded.

In this way, since the incoming sound is produced in synchronization with the beat of the BGM for time saving, a rhythmic sound is output. Therefore, the player can play the game rhythmically by riding the rhythm of the BGM for time saving, which can enhance the player's feelings about the game. Therefore, the interest in the game can be increased.

Further, when a pitching sound is generated, the pitch of the pitching sound is determined based on the code of the time saving BGM at the sounding timing. Specifically, one pitch is selected from the pitches of the constituent sounds that form the chord as the pitch of the pitching sound. As a result, the incoming sound is not only pronounced in time with the beat of the time-saving BGM, but also at a pitch that matches the chord of the time-saving BGM at that time. Therefore, since the chord is composed of the incoming sound and the BGM for time saving, the player can hear a more pleasant sound.

Next, FIG. 32(a) is a diagram showing the sounding timing of the incoming sound when three balls enter the first entrance 64 in one beat of BGM. ), two balls enter the first entrance 64 during one beat of BGM, and one more ball enters the first entrance 64 until the back beat of the next beat. FIG. 32( c) is a diagram for explaining the sounding timing of the incoming sound when the player has entered into, and in FIG. 32( c ), one ball enters the first entrance 64 in one beat with BGM, It is a figure explaining the sounding timing of the ball entry sound when two more balls have entered the first ball entry port 64 before the back beat of the next one beat.

In the cases of FIGS. 32(a) to 32(c), in each case, one to three balls correspond to one of the balls at the timing of the beat next to the one beat when the ball enters the first entrance 64. The pitching sound is generated with the pitch of the constituent sound of the chord at the timing of the beat. Next, at the timing of the back beat of BGM, there are two or more balls entering the first entrance 64 in the stock in which the entrance sound is not pronounced, and the entrance sound is pronounced at the immediately preceding beat. On the condition that it is performed, the incoming ball sound is pronounced. That is, in each of the examples of FIGS. 32(a) to 32(c), the incoming sound is sounded at the back beat of BGM. Then, at the timing of the beat next to the back beat, the incoming sound is further pronounced.

Here, as a condition for generating the incoming sound at the timing of the back beat of BGM, there are two or more incoming balls into the first entrance 64 in the stock in which the incoming sound is not pronounced. And, the condition that the incoming sound is pronounced at the immediately preceding beat is that the incoming sound is continuously pronounced at the previous beat, the current back beat, and the next beat. is there. As a result, when the balls are continuously entered into the first entrance 64, not only the beat timing but also the previous beat, the current back beat, and the next beat are continuously entered. By generating the ball-entering sound, more various rhythms can be carved with the ball-entering sound. In addition, since the ball entry sound is not pronounced on the beat and the ball entry sound is pronounced on the back beat, it is possible to suppress the impression that the rhythm of the ball entry sound is not BGM.

In addition, in two beats, a pitching sound having a pitch of a chord constituent sound is generated, and in a back beat between these two beats, a pitching sound having a pitch of a passing sound of the chord constituent sound is generated. Is pronounced. As a result, the pitching sound is generated while the pitching sound having the elapsed sound as the pitch is inserted between the pitching sounds having the pitch of the constituent sound of the BGM chord while adjusting to the rhythm of the BGM. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to give variations to the melody of the incoming sound accompanied by the BGM for time saving. Therefore, the melody caused by the incoming sound does not become monotonous, and it is possible to perform a voice output that does not bore the player.

In the sound edit/output process (see FIG. 27), details of the frame button operation sound output process (S2137) that is executed when an effect that requires operation of the frame button 22 is being performed are described in detail. This is almost the same as the sound output process (see FIGS. 29 and 30). Specifically, the start prize winning counter 223d used in the start winning sound output processing is replaced with the frame button operation number counter 223f, and the sound to be generated is replaced with the winning sound by the operation sound. Become. By executing the frame button operation sound output process, it is possible to achieve the same operational effect as the operation sound with the winning sound output by the starting winning sound output processing.

In particular, since the operation sound is generated according to the beat of BGM, a rhythmic sound is output. Therefore, the player can play a game such as rhythmically operating the frame button 22 while riding on the rhythm of BGM, so that the player's feelings about the game can be enhanced. Therefore, the interest in the game can be increased.

When an operation sound is produced, the pitch of the operation sound is determined based on the BGM code at the sounding timing. Therefore, by operating the frame button 22, a melody based on the operation sound is played, so that it is possible to perform a voice output that does not make the player tired.

Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 43. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt signal is detected by the MPU 231. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted by the image controller 237 to the MPU 231, and the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. To do.

The MPU 231 normally executes a main process and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of a command or the detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

In this main process, an initial setting process is executed (S2401). Specifically, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 236 is performed. Further, the work RAM 233 is provided with various flags, and an initial value is set to each flag.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected by checking whether the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation has started normally.

After the process of S2401, the interrupt permission is set (S2402), and thereafter, the main process executes the infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2402, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34A, the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 34A is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2501), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 15) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In the V interrupt processing, first, the command determination processing (S2602) is executed, and then the display setting processing (S2603) is executed. In the command determination process (S2602), the contents of the command stored in the command buffer area are analyzed and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the display variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer area, a detailed variation pattern is determined according to the variation pattern type indicated by the display variation pattern command, and the detailed variation pattern is dealt with. The variable display data table is read from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a.

In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 millisecond. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the variation effect is determined, the variation pattern command for display, the display stop type command, etc. are likely to be stored in the command buffer area within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, a mode such as a variation effect selected by the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image according to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 35 to 38.

In the display setting process (S2603), the address specified by the pointer 233c is defined based on the contents of the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b by the command determination process (S2602) and the like. According to the drawn content, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specifically specified.

Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233a. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42.

After the display setting process (S2603) is executed, next, the task process is executed (S2604). In this task process, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 that is specified by the display setting process (S2603), the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes that image is determined. In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S2605). In this drawing process, the drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated from the types of various sprites that form one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S2604), and the drawing list is created. It is transmitted to the image controller 237. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2606). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2606, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. When the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (15R probability jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, front/rear outreach, other than front/rear) The stop type table and the stop type counter corresponding to (reach, complete disengagement) are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 38, the details of the above-mentioned command determination processing (S2602) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing will be described. First, FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing. The command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114.

In this command determination process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2701). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2701: No), the command determination process is terminated. Return to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2701: YES), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2603) that the new command is processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2702), and then, The type of each unprocessed command stored in the command buffer area is analyzed (S2703).

Then, of the unprocessed commands, it is first determined whether or not there is a display reserved ball count command (S2704), and if there is a display reserved ball count command (S2704: Yes), the reserved ball count command processing is performed. Is executed (S2705), and the process returns to S2701.

Here, the details of the reserved ball number command processing (S2705) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36A is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command processing. The reserved ball number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display reserved ball number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the reserved ball number command processing, first, a new reserved ball number command flag is turned on (S2801). The new reserved sphere number command flag is a flag for notifying the display setting process (S2603) that the display reserved sphere number command has been processed in the ON state. Next, the reserved sphere number information included in the display reserved sphere number command is acquired (S2802).

In the process of S2802, if two or more display reserved ball number commands are stored in the command buffer area, the reserved ball number information is acquired from the last stored display reserved ball number command. As a result, the latest information on the number of reserved balls can be obtained.

Then, among the number determination flags provided for each number of retained balls, the number determination flag corresponding to the number of retained balls acquired in the process of S2802 is turned on, and the number determination flags corresponding to the other number of retained balls are turned off. (S2803), the process returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the new holding sphere number command flag is on, by referring to the number determination flag, the holding sphere number pattern for the number of holding spheres corresponding to the number determination flag set on is a small area. The reserved image data is expanded so as to be displayed on Ds1.

Returning to FIG. 35, if it is determined in the process of S2704 that there is no display reserved ball count command (S2704: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display commit command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display confirmation command (S2706) (S2706: Yes), the confirmation command process is executed (S2707) and the process returns to S2701.

Details of the confirmation command process (S2707) will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 36B is a flowchart showing the confirmation command process. This confirmation command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display confirmation command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the confirmation command processing (S2707), the confirmation command flag is set to ON (S2811), and this processing ends. The confirmation command flag is a flag for notifying the display setting process (S2603) that the confirmation command for display has been received in the ON state. In the display setting process, the state of the confirmation command flag is monitored, and when the flag is turned on, the display setting process is executed so that the display of the confirmation display effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. .. In addition, after the display setting of the variable effect is processed, if the fixed command flag is not turned on even after the effect time set for the variable effect is passed, the restart effect (the third symbol is rocked up and down). Display setting processing is executed so that the effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the present embodiment, at the timing of the beat of BGM, it is apparently displayed as if the variation effect was stopped and displayed. In this fake display, the fluctuation table display data table is defined for a time shorter than the original fluctuation time so that the fluctuation effect is stopped and displayed at the timing of the beat of BGM by the fluctuation display data table described later. It is realized by that. In the present embodiment, thereafter, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the original confirmation display timing comes, and the original variation time is secured. As a result, the player can recognize that the variation effect has been stopped along the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can play the game while adjusting to the rhythm of the BGM.

Returning to FIG. 35, if it is determined in the process of S2706 that there is no display confirmation command (S2706: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display demo command among the unprocessed commands ( S2708), if there is a display demo command (S2708: Yes), a demo command process is executed (S2709), and the process returns to S2701.

Details of the demo command process (S2709) will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 36C is a flowchart showing the demo command processing. This demo command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display demo command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the demo command processing (S2709), first, a display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect is selected from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2821). Next, Null data is written in the additional data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared (S2822).

Next, the time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the clock counter 233e (S2823), and the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2824). Then, the confirmation command flag is set to OFF, the demo display flag is set to ON, the confirmation display flag is set to OFF (S2825), and the process returns to the command determination process. The demo display flag is a flag indicating that the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the ON state. The confirmed display flag is a flag indicating that the confirmed display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the ON state.

By executing this demo command process, in the display setting process, the pointer 233c initialized by the process of S2824 is updated, and the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the process of S2821 is updated. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233c is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified. In the display setting process, the time of the demonstration effect defined by the demonstration display data table is measured using the time counter 233e in which the time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set by the process of S2823, and the process of S2825 is performed. Based on the states of the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag set by the above, when it is determined that the demonstration presentation in the demonstration display data table is finished by the timing of the display setting control timing counter 233e, the presentation to be displayed next As a result, control is performed so that the demonstration effect is displayed again.

If both the confirmation command and the demo command are stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination processing, the above-described confirmation command processing (S2707) is executed first, and the confirmation command flag is turned on. Although it is set, the demo command process (S2709) is then executed, and the confirmed command flag is turned off by the process of S2825.

Thereby, in such a case, the demonstration effect is displayed without the fixed display effect. Since the main control device 110 is configured to send the demo command unless the start timing of the fluctuating effect is reached after a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has passed after sending the confirmation command, the main control device 110 should normally be. At the start of execution of the command determination process, it is impossible that the commit command and the demo command are both stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, if all of these commands are stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination processing, it is highly possible that the commands are not transmitted and received normally.

In such a case, the display control device 114 preferentially displays the demonstration effect which is not directly related to the game on the third symbol display device 81, so that an erroneous fixed display effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the result of the game. In addition, the demonstration effect is started without the fixed display effect, so that the player can easily recognize that an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, the player can immediately call a person related to the hall to request a countermeasure.

Returning to FIG. 35, if it is determined in the process of SS2708 that there is no display demo command (S2708: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation start command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display variation start command (S2710) (S2710: Yes), the variation start command process is executed (S2711), and the process returns to S2701.

Here, the details of the fluctuation start command process (S2711) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37A is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start command processing. This fluctuation start command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation start command received from the voice lamp control device 113. The display variation start command is a command transmitted to the display control device 114 when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command and a stop type command instructing the variation start from the main control device 110. .. The display control device 114 starts the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving this display variation start command from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the fluctuation start command process, first, the restart display data table corresponding to the restart effect is selected from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2826). Next, Null data is written in the additional data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared (S2827).

Next, the time data corresponding to the restart effect is set in the clock counter 233e (S2828), and the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2829). Then, the confirmation command flag is set to OFF, the demo display flag is set to OFF, the confirmation display flag is set to OFF (S2830), and the process returns to the command determination process.

In this way, the display control device 114 receives the display variation start command and first displays the restart effect on the third symbol display device 81. That is, when the start of the fluctuating effect is determined in the main control device 110, immediately after the start of the fluctuating effect, the third symbol display device 81 displays the third symbol swinging up and down. As a result, the variation effect based on the third symbol is started.

On the other hand, after transmitting the display variation start command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display variation pattern command to the display control device 114 at the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced. By receiving these display variation pattern commands, the display control device 114 starts the execution of the variation effect according to the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command, and starts the high speed variation of the third symbol. Thereby, it is possible to make the player see that the variation effect of the third symbol is started at the timing of the beat of BGM. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the fluctuation effect is such that the fluctuation effect has started along the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can play the game while adjusting to the rhythm of the BGM.

In the process of S2830, when the demonstration control flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF, when the main control device 110 decides to start the fluctuating effect, the demonstration effect and the confirmation display effect being displayed are replaced. Thus, the variation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, at the start of execution of the command determination process, if both the confirmation command and the display variation start command are stored in the command buffer area, the above-mentioned confirmation command process (S2707) is executed first, and the confirmation command flag is executed. Is set to ON, then the fluctuation start command process (S2711) is executed, and the confirmation command flag is turned OFF by the process of S2830.

Returning to FIG. 35, if it is determined in the process of S2710 that there is no display variation start command (S2710: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display variation pattern command (S2712) (S2712: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S2713), and the processing returns to S2701.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2713) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37B is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the fluctuation pattern command processing, first, a detailed fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is extracted (S2831). Next, the extracted detailed display data table corresponding to the change pattern is read from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2832).

Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation is always made in the main controller 110 for several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command judgment processing is performed. It is not possible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area when executing, but some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2832, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. The table is set in the display data table buffer 233a.

If a display data table for change corresponding to a change pattern having a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233a, the change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control. When instructed by the device 110, while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 is displayed. ) Is received, and the changing third symbol is suddenly stopped and displayed, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table for change corresponding to the change pattern having the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233a, it is actually longer than the set display data table. Even if the fluctuating effect having the fluctuating time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating effect according to the display data table buffer 233a ends, the confirmation command from the main control device 110. Until the display confirmation command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed, so that the player visually recognizes the restart effect as a part of the variable effect. , Until the stop display of the third symbol is confirmed, it is possible to continue watching the fluctuation of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 without a feeling of strangeness.

Next, the Null data is written to the additional data table buffer 233b to clear the content (S2833). Next, the time data indicating the time when the display is controlled by the display data table for change set in the display data table buffer 233a by the process of S2832 is set in the clock counter 233e (S2834). Then, the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2835), and the confirmation command flag, the demo display flag, and the confirmation display flag are all set to OFF (S2836). Then, the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233c initialized by the processing of S2835 is updated, while the display data table for fluctuation set in the display data table buffer 233a by the processing of S2832. From the drawing, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233c is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified.

In the display setting process, the time counter 233e for which the variation time data is set in the process of S2834 is used to measure the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is measured. When it is determined that the process is finished, if the confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control device 110, the confirmation display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the confirmation command (display confirmation command) is not received after the end of the variable effect, the display setting is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, at the timing of the beat of BGM, it is apparently displayed as if the variation effect was stopped and displayed, and this apparent display is based on the variation display data table. This is realized by defining the variation display data table for a time shorter than the original variation time so that the variation effect is stopped and displayed at the timing of the beat. In the present embodiment, after displaying the stop display of the apparent variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 according to the variation table display data table, the restart effect is changed to the third symbol display device 81 until the original fixed display timing is reached. To ensure the original fluctuation time. As a result, the player can recognize that the variation effect has been stopped along the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can play the game while adjusting to the rhythm of the BGM.

If both the display confirmation command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command is given priority, the display variation command is displayed. Since the variation effect accompanying the pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to give priority to the process corresponding to the display variation pattern command. On the other hand, in this command determination process, since the presence/absence of the display commit command is determined first, the commit command process, which is the process corresponding to the display commit command, is always executed first while the display command is issued. The process corresponding to the display variation pattern command is executed later, and like the process of S2836, the confirmation command flag set by the display confirmation command can be turned off by overwriting. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display confirmation command, and the variation effect associated with the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Similarly, if both the display demo command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the process corresponding to the display demo command is given priority, Since the variation effect associated with the variation pattern command will not be performed, it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command determination process, since the presence/absence of the display demo command is determined first, the demo command process, which is the process corresponding to the display demo command, is always executed first, while the display command The processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command is executed later, and like the processing of S2832, the display data table for demonstration set in the display data table buffer 233a by the display demonstration command is overwritten to the display data table for variation. You can Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display demo command, and the variation effect associated with the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, both the display variation start command and the display variation pattern command may be stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands. This is a case where the fluctuation start timing determined by the main control device 110 and the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced are aligned. In this case, if the process corresponding to the display variation start command is prioritized, the variation effect associated with the display variation pattern command is not performed, and the restart effect associated with the display variation start command is performed until it is fixedly displayed. Will end up.

On the other hand, in this command determination process, since the presence/absence of the display variation start command is determined first, the demo command processing that is the process corresponding to the display variation start command is always executed first. , The process corresponding to the display variation pattern command is executed later, and like the process of S2832, the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the display variation start command is overwritten to thereby display the variation display data table. Can be rewritten as Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display variation start command, and the variation effect associated with the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 35, if it is determined in the process of S2712 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2712: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command includes a display stop type command. If there is a display stop type command (S2714) (S2714: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2715) and the process returns to S2701.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2715) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display stop type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (15R certainty variation jackpot, 2R certainty variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, front-rear reach, non-front-reach reach, complete detachment, special stop symbol ) Is determined (S2841), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 34B) is executed. Then, the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set (S2842).

Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2842 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to OFF (S2843) and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variable display data table, in the drawing content corresponding to the address after the predetermined time, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the process of S2842. Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (S2604), after the above-mentioned predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation was started, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2842 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2843, and its identification The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. Then, the address of the character storage area 234a in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified.

It should be noted that the main controller 110 always makes a determination of the start of a change several seconds or more apart from each other. Therefore, no two or more display stop type commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is not possible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command erroneously stops display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2841, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S2842. In such a case, the stop type table may be determined on the assumption that the stop type is a special stop symbol even if it is completely disengaged.

Here, if the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is set, the big hit stop symbol will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is actually out. However, the player may misunderstand that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has become a big hit, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement is set, and in reality, if it is a big hit, the complete disengagement stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the jackpot state, it is possible to please the player.

Returning to FIG. 35, if it is determined in the process of S2714 that there is no display stop type command (S2714: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2722), and the process of S2701. Return to.

In the processing of S2701, which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2701: Yes). ), and the processes of S2702 to S2722 are executed again. Then, the processes of S2701 to S2722 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in S2701 that there are no unprocessed new commands (S2701: No). ), and ends this command determination process.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42, details of the above-described display setting process (S2603), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIGS. 39 and 40 are flowcharts showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 39, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S2901), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S2901: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that the new command is not processed, the processes of S2902 to S2904 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2905. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S2901: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S2902), and then S2903. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by each processing of S2904.

In the process of S2903, it is determined whether or not the new reserved sphere number command flag is on (S2903), and if the new reserved sphere number command flag is on (S2903: Yes), it is displayed in the previous command determination process. When it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has been processed, the reserved image setting process is executed (S2904).

Here, the details of the reserved image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the reserved image setting process. This hold image setting process causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the number of holding balls corresponding to the number of holding balls notified from the voice lamp control device 113, in accordance with the fact that the display holding ball number command is processed. Therefore, it is a process for expanding the image data.

In the reserved image setting process, first, the number determination flag is referred to, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number determination flag that is set to ON is displayed as the number of reserved balls, which is the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4 ). The reserved image data to be displayed in () is expanded (S2951). In the task processing, based on this expanded reserved image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the reserved image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various parameters required.

In the hold image setting process, after the process of S2951, the new hold number command is set to OFF (S2952), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Returning to FIG. 39, after the reserved image setting process (S2904) or in the process of S2903, when it is determined that the new reserved sphere number command flag is not on, that is, is off (S2903: No), then , S2905.

In S2905, pointer update processing is executed (S2905). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update process is performed by updating the pointer 233c that specifies the address from which the corresponding drawing content should be acquired from the display data table and the additional data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b, respectively. Is a process for performing.

In this pointer updating process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233c (S2981). That is, in principle, the pointer 233c is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233a, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233c is updated by the processing of S2981, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233c is End information. Is determined (S2982). As a result, if it is End information (S2982: Yes), it means that the pointer 233c has been updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a past the address at which the actual data is described.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is the demo display data table or the restart display data table (S2983), and the demo display data table or the restart display data is determined. If it is a table (S2983: Yes), the pointer 233c is set to 1 (S2984), and further, it corresponds to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a. The time data is set in the clock counter 233e (S2985), and the process proceeds to S2987. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table, so that the demonstration effect or the restart effect is repeated on the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2983, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is neither the demonstration display data table nor the restart display data table (S2983: No), the pointer 233c The value is subtracted by 1 (S2986), and the process proceeds to S2987. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table and the restart display data table, for example, the variable display data table or the confirmed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a, , The drawing content of the previous address in which the End information is written is always expanded, so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. be able to.

As a result of the processing of S2982, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a, when it is determined that the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233c updated by the processing of S2981 is not End information (S2982: No). ), the processing of S2983 to S2986 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2987.

In the process of S2987, it is determined whether or not the confirmation command flag is ON (S2987), and if the confirmation command flag is OFF instead of ON (S2987: No), the pointer update process is terminated and the display setting is performed. Return to processing. On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2987: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113, and therefore the display data table buffer. The value of the pointer 233c is set to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address where the End information is stored in the display data buffer set to 233a (S2988), and the value of the clock counter is also set to 1. (S2989), the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, when the confirmation command is received, in the display setting process, the drawing content defined at the end of the set display data table can be expanded and the start of the confirmed display effect can be controlled.

Returning to FIG. 39, after the pointer update processing (S2905), the pointer 233c updated by the pointer update processing is displayed from the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. The drawing contents of the address to be expanded are expanded (S2906). In the task process, the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content that was developed in S2906 together with the pending image that was previously developed, and the display coordinate position for each sprite is specified. It determines various parameters necessary for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle. If Null data is described in the additional data table, it is assumed that there is no sprite to be added, and the subsequent processing is executed. When the additional data table buffer 233b is cleared with Null data, the Null data is always expanded from the additional data table buffer 233b.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233e is subtracted by 1 (S2911), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233e after the subtraction is 0 or less (S2912). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233e is 1 or more (S2912: No), the display setting process is ended and the process is returned to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233e is 0 or less (S2912: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a has elapsed. At this time, if the display data table for change is set in the display data table buffer 233a, a finalizing command (display finalizing command) is sent from the main controller 110 via the voice lamp controller 113 at the end of the effect. ) Is to be transmitted, it is checked in the subsequent process of S2913 whether the confirmation command flag is ON (S2913).

As a result, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2913: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113, so stop first. The mode of the fixed display effect according to the stop symbol indicated by the symbol determination flag is determined, the fixed display data table of the mode is set in the display data table buffer 233a, and Null data is written in the additional data table buffer 233b. The contents are cleared (S2914). Next, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the fixed display is set in the clock counter 233e (S2915), and the value of the pointer 233c is further initialized to 0 (S2916). Then, the confirmation command flag is set to OFF (S2917), and then the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S2918), and the content of the stop symbol determination flag is kept as it is in the work RAM 233. Is copied to the previously stopped symbol determination flag provided in (S2919), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display data table for change is set in the display data table buffer 233a, etc., the confirmation command (display confirmation) is issued from the main controller 110 via the voice lamp controller 113 in accordance with the end of the effect. When a command) is received, the drawing content can be set so that the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the fixed display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S2919 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect is started from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, so in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table is started. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is defined until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start. In the task process (S2604), the stop symbol in the previous variable effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S2919 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation started. Then, for the identified stop symbol, the symbol offset information defined in the above-mentioned variation display data table is added to identify the third symbol to be actually displayed. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S2913, if the confirmation command flag is OFF instead of ON (S2913: No), the process proceeds to S2920 shown in FIG. 40, and it is determined whether or not the confirmation display flag is ON (S2920). ). If the confirmed display flag is on (S2920: Yes), the determination result in the process of S2912 (S2912: Yes) means that the confirmed display effect has ended, so the confirmed display flag is set to off. After that (S2921), the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2922), and then the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the data display is set in the clock counter 233e (S2923). Then, the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2924), the demo display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is in the ON state is set to ON (S2925), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display demonstration effect command indicating the start of the demonstration effect is not received by the end of the fixed display effect, automatically, The drawing content can be set so that the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

It is to be noted that the branch condition of S2920: Yes is satisfied when the fixed display effect is being performed, and in this case, the contents of the additional data table buffer 233b are cleared by the processing of S2914. Therefore, in the process of S2922, the clearing process of those data table buffers is omitted. As a result, the processing load on the MPU 231 can be reduced.

In the process of S2920, if the confirmed display flag is not on but on (S2920: No), then it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S2926). If the demo display flag is on (S2926: Yes), the result of the determination in the process of S2912 (S2912: Yes) means that the demonstration effect has ended, so the display setting process is ended and V Return to interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S2926, when the demo display flag is not on but on (S2926: No), the determination result (S2912: Yes) in the process of S2912 means that the fluctuating effect has ended. Therefore, the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a, Null data is written in the additional data table buffer 233b, and the contents are cleared (S2929). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time of the restart effect is set in the clock counter 233e (S2930), the value of the pointer 233c is further initialized to 0 (S2931), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

Here, in the present embodiment, the variation table display data table is defined by the variation display data table for a time period shorter than the original variation time so that the variation effect is apparently stopped and displayed at the timing of the BGM beat. To do. Then, after the apparent stop display, by setting the restart display data table by the process of S2929, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the original confirmed display timing comes, and the original Secure fluctuation time. As a result, the player can recognize that the variation effect has been stopped along the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can play the game while adjusting to the rhythm of the BGM.

Further, in the display control device 114, the confirmation command (transmitted from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 even after a lapse of a predetermined time after the third symbol is stopped and displayed due to the end of the variation effect ( When the display confirmation command) is not received, the drawing content can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as described above, the restart effect is an effect for displaying the image in which the third symbol is vibrated on the third symbol display device 81, so the player uses the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. When it is visually recognized that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the fluctuation of is stopped and displayed, it can be recognized that the stopped symbol is not fixed at that time.

After the last drawing content defined by the restart display data table is expanded, the drawing content is expanded from the beginning of the restart display data table again by the pointer updating process described above. Therefore, the restart effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a display confirmation command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 or a new display variation pattern command is received. Here, the restart effect is to display the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in a mode of vibrating (swinging) the third symbol around a predetermined position, and in the restart display data table, the third symbol is displayed. Only the drawing contents required to be displayed by rocking at least once are specified. Then, by repeatedly developing the drawing content from the beginning of the restart display data table, the restart effect in which the third symbol is repeatedly vibrated is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this way, the restart effect is to cause the third symbol display device 81 to vibrate and display the third symbol, so that the restart display data table is swung the third symbol at least once. Since it is sufficient to store only the drawing content necessary for displaying, it is possible to reduce the capacity required for storing the restart display data table.

Further, when the display confirmation command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2914 shown in FIG. 39 is performed, and the display data table buffer is executed. A confirmation display data table is set in 233a. As a result, even during the restart effect, in response to the reception of the confirmation command for display, the stop display of the third symbol is performed with the stop symbol indicated by the stop symbol determination flag, and the final display effect is the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed on.

Further, when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2832 of FIG. 37B is performed and the display is performed. The variable display data table is set in the data table buffer 233a, and the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the display demonstration command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2821 of FIG. 36C is performed, and the display data is displayed. The display data table for demonstration is set in the table buffer 233a, and the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The restart effect is displayed when the confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110, which should be originally received, is not received after the third symbol is stopped and displayed along with the end of the variation effect. Therefore, there is a possibility that the confirmation command may not be received even while the restart effect is displayed, due to the influence of noise or malfunction. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if the display variation pattern command or the display demo command is received during the restart effect, the effect corresponding to the command can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Various effects on the third symbol display device 81 can be performed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, details of the above-described drawing process (S2605), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2604) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, and filter designation information), a drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated (S3001). That is, in the process of S3001, the address of the character storage area 234a in which the image data of the sprite is stored is specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites that form one frame determined in the task process (S2604). Then, the specified address is associated with the parameter required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image for one frame, and the sprite order after the rearrangement is set to the detail for each sprite. As the drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the address of the character storage area 234a in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag (not shown) are transmitted to the image controller (S3002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag is 0, the first frame buffer provided in the video RAM 236 includes, as the drawing target buffer information, information for instructing to expand the drawn image. If the drawing target buffer flag is 0, the second frame buffer provided in the video RAM includes the information for instructing to expand the drawn image as the drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting it in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the drawing process, after the process of S3002, the drawing target buffer flag is updated (S3003). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Be seen. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer of the video RAM 236 each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 34B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, thereby rendering an image. When the processing and the display processing are executed, the second frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is specified. The first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer from which information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. .. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer. After that, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame are alternately designated for each 20 milliseconds, for each of the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer. As a result, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start prize) is detected, the player is informed that there is a ball. The incoming sound is output in synchronization with the BGM beat and back beat timing. Further, when the frame button 22 is operated, an operation sound for notifying the player of the operation is output in synchronization with the timing of the BGM beat and the back beat.

As a result, the pitching sound and the operation sound are generated in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that a sound with a sense of rhythm is output. Therefore, the player can play the game rhythmically by riding the rhythm of the BGM, which can enhance the player's feelings about the game. Therefore, the interest in the game can be increased.

Further, when a ball-entering sound or an operation sound is pronounced, the pitch of the ball-entering sound or the operation sound is determined by using the constituent sound of the BGM code (chord) or the progressing sound at the sounding timing. As a result, not only the incoming sound and the operation sound are pronounced in time with the beat of the BGM, but also with a pitch that matches the BGM chord at that time. Therefore, it is possible to compose a melody accompanied by BGM with the incoming sound and the operation sound, and let the player hear it. In addition, the melody varies depending on the timing of ball entry and operation, the number of ball entries and the number of operations. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with various melodies played by the sound of entering the ball and the sound of operation depending on the time.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 performs the display for vibrating the third symbol up and down from the original variation start timing to the BGM beat timing. (Pattern shaking period). Then, when the timing of the first BGM beat arrives from the original fluctuation start timing, the reading of the data table corresponding to the detailed fluctuation pattern determined for the fluctuation effect is started at that timing, and The high speed fluctuation of the third symbol is started in the three symbol display device 81.

Here, the display pattern is set in advance so that the display of various effect images during the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed in accordance with the beat of BGM. In addition, the data table defines the output from the audio output device 226 of the sound in accordance with the display of the effect image and the lighting/blinking of the lamp of the lamp display device 227. These are also defined in accordance with the beat of BGM. Done.

Furthermore, in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the timing of the beat of the BGM slightly before the original confirmed display is performed, and that it is stopped and displayed. The stop sound is generated by the sound output device 226. After that, the third symbol display device 81 displays the third symbol vibrating up and down until the original confirmation display timing comes (symbol shaking period), and the third symbol is confirmed and displayed at the original confirmation display timing.

In this way, the variation effect is originally started regardless of the BGM beat and is fixedly displayed, but in the present embodiment, the high-speed variation is started at the timing of the beat, and once again, Display a stop. Then, until the high-speed fluctuation starts from the original fluctuation start timing, from the time when the stop display is performed until the original fixed display timing comes, as the symbol fluctuation period, the display for vibrating the third symbol up and down is displayed. To do.

Thereby, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect is started in synchronization with the beat of BGM, and it can be shown to the player as if the stop display was performed. Further, various effect images displayed during the change effect can be displayed in accordance with the beat of the BGM, and further, the output of the sound according to the change effect, the lighting/blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the The action of the first character 87 can also be performed in synchronization with the beat of BGM. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player a feeling that the variation effect is performed in accordance with the rhythm of BGM, it is possible to perform a rhythmic game and improve the interest of the player.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, the BGM change timing, for example, the timing to start the reproduction of the BGM that is output when a big hit is notified and the big hit, and the big hit performance BGM output during the big hit performance. Once the BGM is changed at the timing of starting or ending the playback of the BGM, the BGM continues to play regardless of the start and stop of the fluctuating effect, and the fake start of the fluctuating effect (start of high-speed fluctuation) The case where the stop display (temporary stop of the third symbol) is executed at the timing of the BGM beat has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the case where the BGM reproduction is started at the start of the fluctuation effect and the BGM reproduction is ended at the end of the fluctuation effect will be described.

In the second embodiment, the sound reproduction start information and the sound reproduction end information of BGM according to the fluctuation effect are defined in the data table set when the detailed fluctuation pattern is determined. Specifically, the BGM sound reproduction start information is defined in the first address (0001H) of the data table. The BGM sound reproduction end information is defined in the data table in association with the address corresponding to the time when the variation effect by the detailed variation pattern ends. Further, at the address where the BGM sound reproduction end information is specified, the sound reproduction start information of the stop sound indicating that the change effect stop display is also specified.

By referring to this data table, the MPU 221 starts the reproduction of the BGM at the start of the fluctuating effect, ends the reproduction of the BGM at the end of the fluctuating effect, and also sounds the stop sound of the fluctuating effect. Will be done.

Here, in the second embodiment, the variation time is defined such that the variation effect ends at the timing of the BGM beat. Therefore, the variation effect ends at the timing of the BGM beat, and the stop sound of the variation effect is also sounded at the timing of the BGM beat. Therefore, it is possible to let the player recognize that the variation effect is stopped together with the rhythm of BGM. Therefore, the variation effect can be rhythmically ended, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the variable display process (S1913) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the sound editing/output process (S1909), the start winning sound output process (S2133), and the frame button operation. This is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that a part of the on-output processing is different. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout controller 111, other various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp controller 113, and display. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the variable display process (S1913) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the variable display processing (S1913).

In this variation display process, first, similarly to the first embodiment, after performing the processes of S2101 to S2104, the display for notifying the display control device 114 of the detailed variation pattern determined in the process of S2104. A fluctuation pattern command is generated and set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3501). In addition, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop symbol acquired by the process of S2103 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3502).

Here, the set display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S1902) executed subsequently in the main process (see FIG. 24). To be done.

That is, in the first embodiment, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command generated at the timing of receiving the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110 are immediately transmitted to the display control device 113. Rather, it is temporarily stored in the RAM 223, and instead, the display variation start command is transmitted to the display control device 113 to start the restart production, so that the variation production is started, and thereafter, at the timing of the beat of BGM. Although the variation pattern command and the display stop type command are transmitted to the display control device 113 to start the high-speed variation of the variation effect, the variation effect is apparently started at the timing of the beat of BGM. In the embodiment, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command generated at the timing of receiving the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110 are immediately transmitted to the display control device 113, and the variation effect is displayed. The high-speed fluctuations of start.

After the processing of S3502, the same processing of S2107 and S2108 as in the first embodiment is performed, and then the data table corresponding to the detailed fluctuation pattern determined by the processing of S2104 is set (S3503). Then, the pointer 223g is initialized to 0 (S3504), and the variable display process ends.

As a result, the MPU 221 sequentially counts up the pointer 223g initialized by the process of S3504, and various control information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 223g of the data table set by the process of S3403 is stored in the data table. According to the control information read from the storage area 222b, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting and blinking of the lamp display device 227, operation of the first accessory 87 (first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and first accessory). The drive of the rotation motor 87e) is controlled.

Here, the reading of various control information from the data table is performed at the timing of the beat of BGM in the sound editing/outputting process (see FIG. 45) as in the first embodiment. Therefore, the sound output from the sound output device 226, the lighting/blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 can be started at the timing of the beat of the BGM, so that the player can play the game rhythmically. You can enjoy Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be increased.

Also, as described above, the BGM sound reproduction start information is defined in the first address (0001H) of the data table, and the BGM sound reproduction end information corresponds to the address corresponding to the time when the variation effect by the detailed variation pattern ends. And is specified in the data table. Further, at the address where the BGM sound reproduction end information is specified, the sound reproduction start information of the stop sound indicating that the change effect stop display is also specified. By referring to this data table, the MPU 221 starts the reproduction of the BGM at the start of the fluctuating effect, ends the reproduction of the BGM at the end of the fluctuating effect, and also sounds the stop sound of the fluctuating effect. Will be done. Here, in the second embodiment, since the variation time is defined such that the variation effect ends at the timing of the beat of BGM, the variation effect ends at the timing of the beat of BGM, and the variation effect stops. The sound is also generated at the timing of the beat of BGM. Therefore, it is possible to let the player recognize that the variation effect is stopped together with the rhythm of BGM. Therefore, the variation effect can be rhythmically ended, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a sound editing/output process (S1908) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the sound editing/output processing (S1908).

In this sound editing/output process, first, it is determined whether or not the pointer 223g is 0 (S3511). Then, if the pointer 233g is not 0 (S3511: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter 223h is equal to the cycle T of the beat of the BGM being reproduced (S2121). As described above in the description of the first embodiment, the timer counter 223h is a counter for counting the cycle T of the beat of BGM being reproduced. When the value of the timer counter 223h is equal to the cycle T of the beat as a result of the processing of S2121 (S2121: Yes), it is determined that the beat timing is reached in the BGM being reproduced, and the process proceeds to S2128, and the pointer 223g is set. 1 is added (S2128), and the control information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 223g after the addition is read from the set data table (S2129). Then, thereafter, the same processing as that of the first embodiment is executed.

With this, at the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced, the audio output from the audio output device 226, the lighting/blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with various control information defined in the data table. Is controlled.

If the pointer 233g is determined to be 0 as a result of the processing of S3531 (S3531: Yes), it means that it is immediately after the data table is set by the MPU 221, so the determination processing of S2121 is skipped and the processing of S2128 is continued. Process shifts to. That is, immediately after the data table is set, the BGM reproduction is not started, and thus the timing of the BGM beat cannot be determined by the determination processing of S2121. Therefore, when the pointer 233g is 0, the process directly proceeds to the process of S2128, and the voice output from the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device are performed according to various control information defined in the first address (0001H) of the data table. Lighting/blinking of 227 and operation of the first accessory 87 are controlled.

Here, the data table is set by the MPU 221 at, for example, the timing when the variation effect is started. Therefore, the sound output from the sound output device 226, the lighting/blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 can be started together with the start of the variation effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a start winning sound output process (S2122) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the start winning sound output process (S2122).

In the start winning sound output process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the pointer 223g is 1 (S3521). Then, if the value of the pointer 223g is not 1 (S3521: No), the process proceeds to S2151, and thereafter, the same process as in the first embodiment is executed.

As a result, when a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) is detected, the sound of the ball that informs the player that there has been a ball is adjusted to the timing of the beat and back beat of the BGM. Output. Therefore, the player can play the game rhythmically by riding the rhythm of the BGM, which can enhance the player's feelings about the game. Therefore, the interest in the game can be increased.

Further, when a pitching tone is sounded, the pitch of the pitching tone is determined by using the constituent sounds of the BGM chord (chord) at the sounding timing and the progressing tone, so that the BGM chord at that time is determined. The player can hear the melody accompanied by BGM by the incoming sound that is produced at the matched pitch. Moreover, since the melody varies depending on the timing of the ball entering and the number of balls entered, it is possible to entertain the player with various melody played by the ball entering sound depending on the time.

On the other hand, if it is determined by the process of S3512 that the value of the pointer 223g is 1 (S3512: Yes), the value of the pointer 223g is changed from 0 to 1 by S2128 of the sound editing/output process (see FIG. 45). This means that the process is performed immediately after the count up, that is, the process that is executed for the first time after the detailed variation pattern is determined and the new data table is set accordingly, and therefore the starting winning counter 223d Is set to 0 (S3521), and the start winning sound output process is ended. Accordingly, the number of balls entered into the first starting opening 64 after the variation effect based on the determined detailed variation pattern is started can be counted by the starting prize counter 223d. Therefore, the sound output device 226 can output the sound of entering the ball corresponding to the ball entering the first starting opening 64 after the variation effect is started.

In the sound edit/output process (see FIG. 45), the frame button operation sound output process (S2137) executed when an effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is performed is the same as that in the first embodiment. Similarly, the details thereof are almost the same as the start winning sound output process. That is, the start prize winning counter 223d used in the start winning sound output process is replaced with the frame button operation number counter 223f, and the generated sound is replaced with the operation sound, which is the frame button operating sound output process. By executing the frame button operation sound output process, it is possible to achieve the same operational effect as the operation sound with the winning sound output by the starting winning sound output processing.

In particular, since the operation sound is generated according to the beat of BGM, a rhythmic sound is output. Therefore, the player can play a game such as rhythmically operating the frame button 22 while riding on the rhythm of BGM, so that the player's feelings about the game can be enhanced. Therefore, the interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment can achieve the same effects as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 59. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 based on the effect determined based on the command or the like from the main control device 110. A case will be described where the lamp display device 227 is turned on or blinked and the mode of operation of the first accessory 87 (driving the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87e) is determined and controlled. did.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, in the display control device 114, the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and the specified display content is controlled by the display control device 114 by the voice lamp. Notify the device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 controls the audio output from the audio output device 226, the lighting/blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first actor 87 according to the display content notified from the display control device 114.

Along with this, in the first and second embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the cycle T of the BGM beats, whereas in the third embodiment, the display control device 114. The period T of the BGM beat is counted, and the display control device 114 notifies the audio lamp control device 113 of the timing of the BGM beat and the back beat.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described focusing on the points different from the first embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and their illustration and description will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 47, details of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 223.

The RAM 223 in the third embodiment is different from the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 9) in that a one-beat flag 223l and a back beat flag 223m are provided instead of the timer counter 223h. .. In the third embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 does not count the cycle T of the beat of BGM, so that the timer counter 223h is not necessary.

The one-beat flag 223l is a flag that indicates the timing of the BGM beat, and indicates that it is the timing of the BGM beat when it is on, and indicates that it is not the timing of the BGM beat when it is off. Further, the backbeat flag 223m is a flag indicating that it is the timing of the backbeat of BGM. When it is on, it indicates the timing of the backbeat of BGM, and when it is off, it indicates the timing of the backbeat of BGM. Indicates that there is no.

Both the one beat flag 223l and the back beat flag 223m are set to the initial value “OFF” in the RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in the startup process (see FIG. 23) executed when the power is turned on. Is set. Here, from the display control device 114, a beat command indicating the timing of the beat of the BGM is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, and at the timing of the back beat of the BGM, the beat command is transmitted. A beat command indicating the timing of the beat is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the MPU 221 receives a beat command indicating that it is the timing of the BGM beat from the display control device 114, the MPU 221 sets the one-beat flag 223l to ON. When the beat command indicating the timing of the back beat of BGM is received from the display control device 114, the back beat flag 223m is set to ON.

The one-beat flag 223l is referred to in the sound editing/output process (see FIGS. 56 and 57), and when the beat flag 223l is on, it is assumed that it is the BGM beat timing, which is the same as in the first embodiment from S2128. The process of S2133 is executed.

By performing the processing of S2128 to S2133 at the timing of the BGM beat, various control information is read from the data table at the timing of the BGM beat, and according to the read various control information, at the timing of the BGM beat, The voice output from the voice output device 226, the lighting/blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are controlled. For example, by the processes of S2130 to S2133, the sound reproduction can be started and stopped at the timing of the BGM beat. Further, based on various control information read here by the lamp edit processing (S1909) of the main processing (FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221, and the first accessory edit drive processing (S1910). The lighting/blinking of the display device 227 and the operation of the first accessory 87 are controlled.

Thereby, in the pachinko machine 10, the sound output, the lighting/blinking of the lamp, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be increased. For example, by the processing of S2130 to S2133, it is possible to start and stop the reproduction of the sound at the timing of the beat of BGM, so that the player can play a rhythmic game.

The data table used in the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment is provided for each effect determined by the voice lamp control device 113 according to a command from the main control device 110 or the like. On the other hand, the data table used in the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment is provided for each of the display contents notified from the display control device 114.

Further, the one beat flag 223l is referred to in the starting winning sound output process (see FIGS. 58 and 59) and the frame button operation sound output process, and when the beat flag 223l is on, it is assumed to be the timing of the BGM beat. The processing of S2156 to S2168 is executed as in the first embodiment. Further, the back beat flag 223m is also referred to in the start winning sound output process (see FIGS. 58 and 59) and the frame button operation sound output process, and when the back beat flag 223m is turned on, at the timing of the back beat of the BGM. Assuming that there is, the processes of S2170 to S2179 are executed as in the first embodiment.

As a result, the incoming sound and the operation sound are generated in synchronization with the timing of the beat and the back beat of the BGM, so that a rhythmic sound is output. Therefore, the player can play the game rhythmically by riding the rhythm of the BGM, which can enhance the player's feelings about the game. Therefore, the interest in the game can be increased.

Further, when a ball-entering sound or an operation sound is pronounced, the pitch of the ball-entering sound or the operation sound is determined by using the constituent sound of the BGM code (chord) or the progressing sound at the sounding timing. As a result, not only the incoming sound and the operation sound are pronounced in accordance with the beat and back beat of the BGM, but also at a pitch that matches the BGM chord at that time. Therefore, it is possible to compose a melody accompanied by BGM with the incoming sound and the operation sound, and let the player hear it. In addition, the melody varies depending on the timing of ball entry and operation, the number of ball entries and the number of operations. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with various melodies played by the sound of entering the ball and the sound of operation depending on the time.

The one beat flag 223l and the back beat flag 223m include the start prize winning sound output process (see FIGS. 58 and 59) and the frame button operation sound output process in the sound editing/output process (see FIGS. 56 and 57). After the process of referring to these flags is performed, both are set to OFF (S4002 and S4003 in FIG. 57).

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 48 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 in the third embodiment is different from the display control device 114 in the first embodiment in that the work RAM 233 is provided with a timer counter 233f and is stored in the display data table storage area 232a. That is, the contents specified in the display data table are partially different.

The timer counter 233f is a counter for the display control device 114 to count the cycle of BGM beats. The MPU 231 uses the timer counter 233f to determine the timing of the beat and back beat of the BGM being reproduced. In the display setting process (S2603), the MPU 231 determines whether or not it is the BGM change timing based on the command newly received from the voice lamp control device 113, and when it is determined that it is the BGM change timing, A BGM reproduction start command including information on the changed BGM type is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to start reproduction of a new BGM, and the timer counter 233f is set to 1. It is initialized (S3611 to S3614 in FIG. 51).

Further, the program ROM 232 stores the tempo of all BGMs to be reproduced, and the MPU 231 reads the tempo of the BGM to be reproduced from the program ROM 232, and from that, the cycle T of the beats (the cycle of the beats). (Millisecond) divided by 20 milliseconds) is calculated (S3613 in FIG. 51).

After that, the timer counter 233f is incremented by 1 in the display setting process executed every 20 milliseconds. However, when the value of the timer counter 233f matches the cycle T of the beat, "1" is set instead of adding 1. As a result, the timer counter 233f counts the cycle of BGM beats.

When the value of the timer counter 233f is T, the MPU 231 determines that it is the timing of the BGM beat, and transmits a beat command indicating that it is the timing of the BGM beat to the audio lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 recognizes the timing of the BGM beat by receiving the beat command indicating that it is the timing of the BGM beat. Further, when the value of the timer counter 233f is T/2, the MPU 231 determines that it is the timing of the back beat of BGM, and issues a beat command indicating that it is the timing of the back beat of BGM to the audio lamp control device 113. Send. The voice lamp control device 113 grasps the back beat timing of the BGM beat by receiving the beat command indicating that it is the back beat timing of the BGM.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226, lights/flashes the lamp display device 227, and operates the first accessory 87 (the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a at the timing of the BGM beat). (1 driving of the accessory rotating motor 87e) is controlled. As a result, voice output, lighting/blinking of the lamp, and operation of the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of BGM.

Further, the sound lamp control device 113 has a sound of entering a ball that informs that there is a ball entering the first entrance 64 and an operation of the frame button 22 at the timing of the beat and the back beat of the BGM. A control is performed to generate an operation sound for notifying that. Therefore, the ball entry sound and the operation sound are generated at the timing of the beat and the back beat of the BGM, so that the player can hear the ball entry sound and the operation sound that match the rhythm of the BGM.

Since the display control device 114 updates the value of the timer counter 223f every 20 milliseconds, it can count the cycle of BGM beats only at 20 millisecond intervals. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the BGM tempo is set so that the cycle of the BGM beat is a multiple of 20 milliseconds. That is, the BGM tempo is determined by the display controller 114 based on the update interval of the value of the timer counter 223f. For example, when the V interrupt process is executed every 30 milliseconds, the value of the timer counter 223f is also updated every 30 milliseconds. Therefore, the BGM tempo is set so that the cycle of the BGM beat is a multiple of 30 milliseconds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, details of the display data table stored in the display data table storage area 232a of the display control device 114 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table for change in the display data table.

The display data table in the third embodiment is different from the display data table in the first embodiment in that, in addition to the drawing content, the display content of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from now on at some addresses. Is the point that regulates. For example, when displaying a high-speed fluctuation in the fluctuation effect, the display content is defined as "high-speed fluctuation display", and when displaying a girl character image, the display content is defined as "girl character display", and the light emission effect When displaying an image, the display content is defined as “light emission effect display”.

The display content is also included in the additional data table. That is, in the additional data table that defines the display of the image to be additionally displayed with respect to the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table, the display content is defined at some addresses.

The display contents defined in the display data table and the additional data table are used to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, when the display content is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 223c in the display data table or the additional data table, the MPU 231 issues a display type command including information indicating the display content to the voice lamp control device 113. To send.

Upon receiving the display type command from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice corresponding to the display content indicated by the display type command from the voice output device 226 to turn on/blink the lamp display device 227. Then, control for operating the first accessory 87 is performed. Thereby, it is possible to easily output the sound from the sound output device 226, turn on/blink the lamp display device 227, or operate the first accessory 87 in accordance with the display content.

Here, in the display data table and the additional data table, a new image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the timing of the beat of BGM, the image is deleted, or the image is changed, The drawing contents are specified and the display contents are specified. Therefore, the voice output from the voice output device 226, the lighting/blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are also started at the timing of the beat of BGM. Then, as described above, in the audio lamp control device 113, the audio output from the audio output device 226 which has started to be executed, the lighting/blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the first character object 87 are executed in synchronization with the timing of the beat of BGM. Control the behavior of. Therefore, the display of the image on the third symbol display device 81, the voice output from the voice output device 226, the lighting/blinking of the lamp control device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM. The player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2713), which is one processing of the command determination processing (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing.

In the fluctuation pattern command processing in the third embodiment, after the detailed fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is extracted by the processing of S2831, the detailed fluctuation pattern flag corresponding to the extracted detailed fluctuation pattern is turned on. The detailed variation pattern flags corresponding to the other detailed variation patterns are set to OFF (S3601). Here, the detailed variation pattern flag is a flag provided for all detailed variation patterns, and indicates that the variation effect is performed by the detailed variation pattern corresponding to the turned-on detailed variation pattern flag.

Next, the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a (S3602). Then, after the Null data is written to the additional data table buffer 233b to clear the content (S2833), the restart effect defined by the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the process of S3602 is executed. Time data representing time is set in the clock counter 233e (S3603). Then, the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2835), and the confirmation command flag, the demo display flag, and the confirmation display flag are all set to OFF (S2836). Then, the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233c initialized by the processing of S2835 is updated, while the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the processing of S3602. From the drawing, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233c is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified.

That is, when the MPU 231 receives the display variation pattern command from the voice lamp control device 113, first, the restart effect (effect in which the third symbol moves up and down) is executed on the third symbol display device. Then, when it becomes the timing of the beat of BGM, the variation effect according to the detailed variation pattern corresponding to the detailed variation pattern flag set to ON by the processing of S3601 is started, and first, the high-speed variation of the third symbol is performed. It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the variation display data table which is the display data table for executing the variation effect according to the detailed variation pattern, the variation effect of the third symbol is apparently displayed at the timing of the beat of BGM, and the variation effect is stopped and displayed. It looks as if it were tall. Specifically, this fake display is performed by changing the change table display data table for a time period shorter than the original change time so that the change effect is stopped and displayed at the timing of the BGM beat by the change display data table. It is realized by prescribing. In the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, thereafter, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the original confirmed display timing comes, and the original variation time is secured. This allows the player to recognize that the variation effect has been stopped along with the rhythm of BGM.

Therefore, it is possible for the player to appear as if the variation effect is started in accordance with the beat of BGM and is stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to put the player on the rhythm of BGM to enjoy the variation effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the details of the display determination process (S2603) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the display setting process.

In the display determination process according to the third embodiment, when the new command flag is on and it is determined that the new command is determined in the previous command determination process (S2901: Yes), after the reserved image setting process (S2904). Alternatively, in the process of S2903, if it is determined that the new reserved ball number command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S2903: No), then it is determined whether it is the BGM change timing (S3611). .. Whether or not it is the timing of changing the BGM is determined based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113. For example, based on the command, it is the timing to start the reproduction of the BGM output when the big hit is notified and the big hit is notified, the timing to start or end the reproduction of the big hit production BGM output during the big hit performance, and the like. If it is determined that the BGM is changed, it is determined as the BGM change timing.

When it is determined that it is the BGM change timing (S3611: Yes), a BGM playback start command including information about the changed BGM type is generated and transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 (S3612). .. As a result, the audio lamp control device 113 starts the reproduction of the BGM of the type included in the BGM reproduction start command, and the BGM reproduction start command is output from the audio output device 226.

Next, the tempo of the BGM of the type in which reproduction is started is read from the program ROM 232, the cycle T of the BGM beat (a value obtained by dividing the cycle (milliseconds) of the beat by 20 milliseconds) is calculated, and stored in the work RAM 233. It is stored (S3613). Also, the timer counter 233f is initialized to 1 (S3614). By updating the timer counter 233f while counting up in the display setting process executed every 20 milliseconds, and counting up to the cycle T of the BGM beats calculated in the process of S3613, the MPU 231 becomes a timer. The counter 233f can be used to grasp the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced.

As a result of the processing of S2901, it is determined that the new command flag is off (S2901: No), as a result of the processing of S3611, it is determined that it is not the BGM change timing (S3611: No), or S3614. After the processing of step S3615, the processing proceeds to step S3615. In the process of S3615, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to the cycle T of the beat of the BGM being reproduced (S3615). As a result, when the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to the cycle T of the beat of the BGM being reproduced (S3615: Yes), it is the timing of the beat of the BGM, so the beat command indicating the timing of the beat of the BGM is issued. It is set (S3616).

The beat command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt process is next started. The voice lamp controller 113 can grasp the timing of the BGM beat by receiving this beat command. Since the transmission of the beat command is performed at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt processing is started next, the transmission of the beat command is permitted at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt processing is executed. The display setting process executed in the V interrupt process has a command determination process before it, and is not necessarily executed at intervals of 20 milliseconds, and there is a slight deviation. Therefore, since the beat command is not accurately generated at intervals of 20 milliseconds, if the generated beat command is directly transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the BGM beat grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 is detected. There is a risk that the intervals will be displaced. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the beat command is allowed to be transmitted at 20 millisecond intervals at which the V interrupt processing is executed, the BGM beat intervals grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 are accurately maintained. You can put it on.

Next, it is determined whether or not the detailed variation pattern flag is set by the processing of S3601 of the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 50) (S3617). If the detailed fluctuation pattern flag is set (S3617: Yes), the detailed fluctuation pattern setting process is executed (S3618).

Here, details of the detailed variation pattern setting process (S3618) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the detailed variation pattern setting process (S3618) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. The detailed fluctuation pattern setting process is a process of setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the detailed fluctuation pattern in the display data table buffer 233a and executing the fluctuation effect based on the detailed fluctuation pattern.

In the detailed fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the detailed fluctuation pattern in which the detailed fluctuation pattern flag is set to ON is set in the display data table buffer 233a (S3631). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the additional data table buffer 233b (S3632).

Next, the time data indicating the time when the display is controlled by the display data table for change set in the display data table buffer 233a by the processing of S3631 is set in the clock counter 233e (S3633). Then, the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S3634), and the confirmation command flag, the demo display flag, the confirmation display flag and all the detailed variation pattern flags are set to OFF (S3635). Then, the process returns to the display setting process.

As a result, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233c initialized by the process of S3634, the display data table for change set in the display data table buffer 233a by the process of S3631 is changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233c. The specified drawing content is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified. Therefore, the variation effect based on the detailed variation pattern can be executed by the third symbol display device 81 according to the variation display data table set by the process of S3631.

Here, when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 does not immediately execute the variation effect according to the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command, but once. , Execute the restart effect. Then, the detailed variation pattern setting process is executed at the timing of the BGM beat, and the execution of the variation effect according to the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is started. Specifically, the high speed fluctuation of the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, in the variation display data table, which is the display data table for executing the variation effect in accordance with the detailed variation pattern, the variation effect of the third symbol is apparently the variation effect at the timing of the beat of BGM. Is displayed as if it was stopped. This allows the player to recognize that the variation effect has been stopped along with the rhythm of BGM. Therefore, since it is possible for the player to appear as if the variation effect is started in accordance with the beat of BGM and is displayed as a stop, the player can enjoy the variation effect by putting the rhythm of BGM. it can.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. After execution of the detailed variation pattern setting process (S3618) or when it is determined by the process of S3617 that the detailed variation pattern flag is not set (S3617: No), the value of the timer counter 233f is set to 1 next. Yes (S3619). As a result, the timer counter 233f starts counting the cycle T of the BGM beats again. Then, the process proceeds to S2905.

As a result of the processing in S3615, if the value of the timer counter 233f is not equal to the cycle T of the BGM beat (S3615: No), then the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to half the cycle of the BGM beat (T/2). It is determined whether or not (S3620). Then, when the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to half the cycle of the BGM beat (T/2) (S3620: Yes), it is the timing of the back beat of the BGM, and therefore it is the timing of the back beat of the BGM. The beat command shown is set (S3621).

The beat command set here is also transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt processing is started next, similarly to the beat command indicating that it is the timing of the beat. The voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the timing of the back beat of the BGM by the beat command indicating the timing of the back beat of the BGM. The reason why the beat command indicating the timing of the back beat of the BGM is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt processing is started next is that the timing of the beat of the BGM. The reason is the same as the reason why the beat command indicating the is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt process is started next. That is, by permitting the transmission of the beat command at 20 millisecond intervals at which the V interrupt processing is executed, it is possible to accurately maintain the intervals of the beats and back beats of the BGM grasped by the voice lamp control device 113. it can.

When it is determined that the value of the timer counter 233f is not equal to half the cycle of the BGM beat (T/2) after the process of S3621 or by the process of S3620 (S36220: No), the process proceeds to S3622. After shifting, the timer counter 233f is updated by adding 1 to the value of the timer counter 233f (S3622). Then, the process proceeds to S2905.

In the processing of S2905, the same pointer update processing as in the first embodiment is executed (S2905). After that, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233c updated by the pointer update processing is expanded from the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b (S3623). In the task processing, the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the processing of S3623 together with the pending image previously developed, and the display coordinate position is set for each sprite. It determines various parameters necessary for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle. If Null data is described in the additional data table, it is assumed that there is no sprite to be added, and the subsequent processing is executed. When the additional data table buffer 233b is cleared with Null data, the Null data is always expanded from the additional data table buffer 233b.

In the process of S3623, in the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b, the address indicated by the pointer 233c is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the content (see FIG. 49) is specified, a display type command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the display content is generated, and the generated display type command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Thereby, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. In the voice lamp control device 113, the voice that matches the display content notified by the display type command is output from the voice output device 226, the lamp display device 227 is turned on/blinked, and the first accessory 87 is operated. Done.

Here, as described above, in the display data table and the additional data table, the drawing contents are defined and combined so that the image is newly displayed, changed, or deleted at the timing of the BGM beat. It specifies the display content. That is, the display content is defined in association with the address that is the timing of the BGM beat, and the display type command is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing of the BGM beat.

As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, the reproduction of voice according to the display content, the lighting/blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are started at the timing of the beat of BGM. In this way, the output of the sound according to the display content and the start of the driving of the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be increased.

After the processing of S3623, the processing shifts to the processing of S2911 which is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thereafter, the same processing as that of the first embodiment is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the details of the main process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the main processing.

The main processing in the third embodiment is different from the main processing in the first embodiment in that the display command determination processing (S3701) is executed after the command determination processing (S1914). In this display command determination processing (S3701), processing according to the command received from the display control device 114 is performed.

Details of the display command determination processing (S3701) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the display command determination processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113. The command received from the display control device 114 is temporarily stored in the display control command storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223.

In the display command determination processing, first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the display control device 114 is read from the display control command storage area and analyzed, and whether the display type command is received from the display control device 110 is read. It is determined whether or not (S3801). When it is determined that the display type command is received (S3801: Yes), the display content (display type) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is extracted from the received display type command (S3802). Then, the data table corresponding to the display content is read out from the ROM 222 and set (S3803), the pointer 223g is initialized to 0 (S3804), and the display command determination processing ends.

Thereby, the voice lamp control device 113 reproduces the voice in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 according to the data table set by the process of S3803, and outputs it from the voice output device 226. Further, according to the data table, the lamp display device 227 is controlled to be turned on and off, and the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87e are operated to operate the first accessory 87. Control to drive.

Here, the display type command is a command transmitted from the display control device 114 at the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced, as described above. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 reproduces the voice corresponding to the display content indicated by the display type command, turns on/blinks the lamp display device 227, and operates the first accessory 87 at the timing of the BGM beat. You can start from.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3801, if it is determined that the display type command is not received (S3801: No), then it is determined whether or not the BGM reproduction start command is received from the display control device 114 (S3808). .. As a result, if it is determined that the BGM reproduction start command has been received (S3808: Yes), the BGM reproduction start command of the type designated by the BGM reproduction start command is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S3809). As a result, the reproduction of the designated BGM is started, and the sound output device 226 outputs the sound.

Next, it is determined whether or not the BGM at which the reproduction is started is the time saving BGM (S3810), and if it is the time saving BGM (S3810: Yes), the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is set to ON (S3811), and the time saving is performed. If it is not the background BGM (S3810: No), the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is set to OFF (S3812). As a result, while the time saving BGM is being played back as the BGM, the sound of entering the ball into the first entrance 64 is notified by the processing of S2134 and S2135 of the sound editing/output processing (see FIG. 56). A start winning sound output process is executed which is reproduced at the timing of the BGM for time saving. When the processing of S3811 or S3812 ends, the display command determination processing ends.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3808, when it is determined that the BGM reproduction start command has not been received (S3808: No), it is then determined whether a beat command has been received from the display control device 114 (S3813). Then, when it is determined that the beat command is received (S3813: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the beat command indicates the timing of the BGM beat (S3814).

As a result, if the beat command indicates the timing of the BGM beat (S3814: Yes), the one beat flag 223l is set to ON (S3815), and the display command determination process ends. As a result, the MPU 221 performs control based on the turned-on one-beat flag 223l while determining that it is the timing of the BGM beat.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3814, if the beat command does not indicate that it is the timing of the beat of the BGM (S3814: No), the beat command whose reception is confirmed by the processing of S3813 indicates the timing of the back beat of the BGM. Since it is a beat command, the back beat flag 223m is set to ON (S3816), and the display command determination process ends. As a result, the MPU 221 performs control based on the turned-on backbeat flag 223m while determining that it is the timing of the backbeat of BGM.

When it is determined that the beat command has not been received as a result of the processing in S3813 (S3813: No), it is then determined whether another command has been received from the display control device 114 (S3817). Then, if no other command has been received (S3817: No), the display command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if another command has been received (S3817: Yes), a process according to the other command is executed (S3818), the display command determination process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

With reference to FIG. 55, the variable display processing (S1913) executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described in detail with reference to values. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this variable display processing (S1913).

In this variation display process, first, similarly to the first embodiment, after performing the processes of S2101 to S2104, the display for notifying the display control device 114 of the detailed variation pattern determined in the process of S2104. A fluctuation pattern command is generated and set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3501). In addition, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop symbol acquired by the process of S2103 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3502).

Here, the set display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S1902) executed subsequently in the main process (see FIG. 24). To be done.

That is, in the first embodiment, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command generated at the timing of receiving the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110 are immediately transmitted to the display control device 113. Rather, it is temporarily stored in the RAM 223, and instead, the display variation start command is transmitted to the display control device 113 to start the restart production, so that the variation production is started, and thereafter, at the timing of the beat of BGM. Although the variation pattern command and the display stop type command are transmitted to the display control device 113 to start the high-speed variation of the variation effect, the variation effect is apparently started at the timing of the beat of BGM. In the embodiment, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command generated at the timing of receiving the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110 are immediately transmitted to the display control device 113. Then, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, first, the restart effect is executed, and the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is generated at the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced. Based on this, the variation effect is executed.

After the processing of S3502, the same processing of S2107 and S2108 as in the first embodiment is performed, and the variable display processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56 and FIG. 57, the details of the sound editing/output processing (S1908) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. 56 and 57 are flowcharts showing this sound editing/output processing (S1908).

In the sound editing/output processing in the third embodiment, first, as shown in FIG. 57, it is determined whether or not the one-beat flag 223l is on (S4001). Then, when the one-shot flag 223l is off (S4001: No), the process proceeds to S2134, while when the one-shot flag 223l is on (S4001: Yes), it is the beat timing of the BGM being reproduced. The same processes of S2128 to S2133 as in the first embodiment are executed, and the process proceeds to S2134. That is, the control information associated with the address indicated by the pointer 223g in the set data table is read while sequentially counting up the pointer 223g at the timing of the BGM beat being reproduced, and if there is sound reproduction start information, A reproduction start command including sound information for starting reproduction is set in the sound output LSI 301, and if there is sound reproduction stop information, a reproduction stop command including sound information for stopping reproduction is set in the sound output LSI 301.

That is, the various control information is read from the data table at the timing of the BGM beat, and the audio output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned on at the timing of the BGM beat according to the read various control information. -Blinking, the operation of the first accessory 87 is controlled. For example, by the processes of S2130 to S2133, the sound reproduction can be started and stopped at the timing of the BGM beat. Further, based on various control information read here by the lamp edit processing (S1909) of the main processing (FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221, and the first accessory edit drive processing (S1910). The lighting/blinking of the display device 227 and the operation of the first accessory 87 are controlled.

Thereby, in the pachinko machine 10, the sound output, the lighting/blinking of the lamp, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be increased. For example, by the processing of S2130 to S2133, it is possible to start and stop the reproduction of the sound at the timing of the beat of BGM, so that the player can play a rhythmic game.

The processing of S2134 to S2137 and the processing of S2138 to S2141 shown in FIG. 57 are the same processing as the first embodiment. Then, when it is determined that there is end information of the effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 after the processing of S2141 or as a result of the processing of S2140 (S2140: No), in the third embodiment, The process shifts to S4002, and the one beat flag 223l is set to OFF (S4002). Further, the back beat flag 223m is set to OFF (S4003), and the sound editing/output process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59, the details of the starting winning sound output process (S2135) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. 58 and 59 are flowcharts showing the start winning sound output process (S2135).

The start winning sound output process according to the third embodiment is different from the starting winning sound output process according to the first embodiment in that it is different in whether or not it is the timing of the beat and back beat of the BGM being reproduced. This is the same as the start winning sound output process in the first embodiment. Specifically, instead of the process of S2155 in the first embodiment, the process of S4101 is executed to determine whether or not the one-beat flag 223l is on, thereby determining whether or not it is the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced. It is determined (S4101). Then, if the one-beat flag 223l is on (S4101: Yes), it is the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced, and therefore the same processing of S215 to S2168 as in the first embodiment is executed.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S4101, when the one-beat flag 223l is off (S4101: No), the processing of S4102 shown in FIG. 49 is executed instead of the processing of S2169 of the first embodiment. That is, by determining whether or not the backbeat flag 223m is ON, it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the backbeat of the BGM being reproduced (S4102).

If the back beat flag 223m is on (S4102: Yes), it is the back beat timing of the BGM being reproduced, and therefore the same processes of S2170 to S2179 as in the first embodiment are executed. On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S4102, if the back beat flag 223m is off (S4102: No), the start winning sound output processing is ended.

In the starting winning sound output process of the third embodiment, the processes of S2151 to S2154 are the same as those of the first embodiment.

Therefore, the MPU 221 can achieve the same effect as the starting winning sound output process in the first embodiment by executing the starting winning sound output process in the third embodiment.

The details of the frame button operation sound output process (S2137) in the third embodiment are almost the same as the starting winning sound output process in the third embodiment, and more specifically, they are used in the starting winning sound output process. The start button winning counter 223d is replaced with the frame button operation number counter 223f, and the sound to be generated is replaced with the prize sound from the operation sound, which is the frame button operation sound output processing. Therefore, the MPU 221 can achieve the same effect as the frame button operation sound output process of the first embodiment by executing the frame button operation sound output process of the third embodiment.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, the display control device 114 counts the cycle of the beat of the BGM being reproduced, detects the timing of the beat and the back beat of the BGM, and outputs the sound lamp. Notify the control device 113. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 performs control such that voice reproduction, lighting/blinking of the lamp display device 227, and operation of the first accessory 87 are performed at the timing of the beat or back beat of BGM. As a result, the same operational effect as that of the first embodiment is achieved.

In other words, when a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) is detected, the sound of a ball that informs the player that there is a ball is matched with the timing of the BGM beat and back beat. Output. Further, when the frame button 22 is operated, an operation sound for notifying the player of the operation is output in synchronization with the timing of the BGM beat and the back beat.

As a result, the pitching sound and the operation sound are generated in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that a sound with a sense of rhythm is output. Therefore, the player can play the game rhythmically by riding the rhythm of the BGM, which can enhance the player's feelings about the game. Therefore, the interest in the game can be increased.

Further, when a ball-entering sound or an operation sound is pronounced, the pitch of the ball-entering sound or the operation sound is determined by using the constituent sound of the BGM code (chord) or the progressing sound at the sounding timing. As a result, not only the incoming sound and the operation sound are pronounced in time with the beat of the BGM, but also with a pitch that matches the BGM chord at that time. Therefore, it is possible to compose a melody accompanied by BGM with the incoming sound and the operation sound, and let the player hear it. In addition, the melody varies depending on the timing of ball entry and operation, the number of ball entries and the number of operations. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with various melodies played by the sound of entering the ball and the sound of operation depending on the time.

According to the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 displays the third symbol vertically vibrating from the original variation start timing to the BGM beat timing. (Pattern shaking period). Then, when the timing of the first BGM beat arrives from the original fluctuation start timing, the reading of the data table corresponding to the detailed fluctuation pattern determined for the fluctuation effect is started at that timing, and The high speed fluctuation of the third symbol is started in the three symbol display device 81.

Here, the display pattern is set in advance so that the display of various effect images during the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed in accordance with the beat of BGM. In addition, the data table defines the output from the audio output device 226 of the sound in accordance with the display of the effect image and the lighting/blinking of the lamp of the lamp display device 227. These are also defined in accordance with the beat of BGM. Done.

Furthermore, in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the timing of the beat of the BGM slightly before the original confirmed display is performed, and that it is stopped and displayed. The stop sound is generated by the sound output device 226. After that, the third symbol display device 81 displays the third symbol vibrating up and down until the original confirmation display timing comes (symbol shaking period), and the third symbol is confirmed and displayed at the original confirmation display timing.

In this way, the variation effect is originally started regardless of the BGM beat and is fixedly displayed, but in the present embodiment, the high-speed variation is started at the timing of the beat, and once again, Display a stop. Then, until the high-speed fluctuation starts from the original fluctuation start timing, from the time when the stop display is performed until the original fixed display timing comes, as the symbol fluctuation period, the display for vibrating the third symbol up and down is displayed. To do.

Thereby, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect is started in synchronization with the beat of BGM, and it can be shown to the player as if the stop display was performed. Further, various effect images displayed during the change effect can be displayed in accordance with the beat of the BGM, and further, the output of the sound according to the change effect, the lighting/blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the The action of the first character 87 can also be performed in synchronization with the beat of BGM. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player a feeling that the variation effect is performed in accordance with the rhythm of BGM, it is possible to perform a rhythmic game and improve the interest of the player.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment has the same function and effect as the pachinko machine 10 according to the corresponding embodiment, based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment or the second embodiment. You can

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described third embodiment, similar to the first embodiment, the BGM change timing, for example, the timing of starting the reproduction of the BGM output when a big hit is notified and the big hit performance. Once the BGM is changed at the timing of starting or ending the reproduction of the jackpot effect BGM that is output at some time, the BGM continues to play regardless of the start and stop of the variable effect and the start of the fake effect effect (high speed The case has been described in which the start of fluctuation) and the apparent stop display (temporary stop of the third symbol) are executed at the timing of the BGM beat.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, similarly to the second embodiment, the BGM reproduction is started at the start of the variation effect and the BGM reproduction is ended at the end of the variation effect. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, in the display control device 114, the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and the specified display content is displayed from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device. The sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display content notified from the display control device 114, and accordingly, the sound output from the sound output device 226, the lighting/blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the first role. It is common to the third embodiment in that the operation of the object 87 is controlled. Further, the third embodiment is different from the third embodiment in that the display control device 114 counts the cycle T of BGM beats, and the display control device 114 notifies the audio lamp control device 113 of the timing of the BGM beat and the back beat. Common.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described focusing on the points different from the third embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as those in the third embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and their illustration and description will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 60, the details of the display setting process (S2603) executed by the display control device 114 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the display setting process (S2603).

In the display setting process of the fourth embodiment, the processes of S3611-S14 and the processes of S3615-S3622 that are executed in the display setting process of the third embodiment are not executed. After the pointer update process (S2905) is executed, the processes of S4201 to S4210 are executed instead of the process of S3624. The other processing in the fourth embodiment is the same as the display setting processing in the third embodiment.

First, in the processing of S4201, drawing of the address indicated by the pointer 233c updated by the pointer update processing (S2905) from the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. The contents are expanded (S4201). In the task processing, the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the processing of S3623 together with the pending image previously developed, and the display coordinate position is set for each sprite. It determines various parameters necessary for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle. If Null data is described in the additional data table, it is assumed that there is no sprite to be added, and the subsequent processing is executed. When the additional data table buffer 233b is cleared with Null data, the Null data is always expanded from the additional data table buffer 233b.

In the process of S4201, in the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b, the display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the address indicated by the pointer 233c. If the content (see FIG. 49) is specified, a display type command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the display content is generated, and the generated display type command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Thereby, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. In the voice lamp control device 113, the voice that matches the display content notified by the display type command is output from the voice output device 226, the lamp display device 227 is turned on/blinked, and the first accessory 87 is operated. Done.

Here, when the display data table for change is set, the high-speed change display is defined as the display content at the first address (0001H), and accordingly, the MPU 231 instructs the audio lamp control device 113. , A display type command indicating high-speed fluctuation display of a detailed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table is transmitted. Upon receiving the display type command, the voice lamp control device 113 starts playing back the BGM corresponding to the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display type command. That is, the reproduction of BGM is started at the start of the variation effect.

In the display data table for change, a stop display is defined as the display content at the last address corresponding to the end time of the change effect, and accordingly, the MPU 231 displays the stop display to the audio lamp control device 113. Send the display type command shown. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the display type command, it sounds a stop sound indicating that the stop display of the variation effect is generated and stops the reproduction of the BGM.

Here, in the fourth embodiment, the variation time is defined such that the variation effect ends at the timing of the BGM beat. Therefore, the variation effect ends at the timing of the BGM beat, and the stop sound of the variation effect is also sounded at the timing of the BGM beat. Therefore, it is possible to let the player recognize that the variation effect is stopped together with the rhythm of BGM. Therefore, the variation effect can be rhythmically ended, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Also in the fourth embodiment, the display data table and the additional data table define the drawing content so that the image is newly displayed, changed, or deleted at the timing of the BGM beat, The display contents are also specified. That is, the display content is defined in association with the address that is the timing of the BGM beat, and the display type command is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing of the BGM beat.

As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, the reproduction of voice according to the display content, the lighting/blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are started at the timing of the beat of BGM. In this way, the output of the sound according to the display content and the start of the driving of the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be increased.

After the processing of S4201, it is determined whether it is the BGM change timing (S4202). As the BGM change timing, for example, in addition to the above-described change effect start timing, a timing to start display indicating that a big hit has occurred, a timing to start the big hit effect, and a display to indicate end of the big hit effect. Timing etc. These timings are determined based on the display content defined in the set display data table and additional data table.

As a result of the processing in S4202, when it is determined that it is the BGM change timing (S4202: Yes), the tempo of the BGM of the type in which the reproduction is started is read from the program ROM 232, and the cycle T of the beat of the BGM is calculated. , And is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4203). Further, the timer counter 233f is initialized to 1 (S4204). This timer counter 233f is updated while being counted up in the display setting process executed every 20 milliseconds, and by counting up to the cycle T of the BGM beat calculated in the process of S4203, the MPU 231 becomes The counter 233f can be used to grasp the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced.

After the processing of S4204 or as a result of the processing of S4202, when it is determined that it is not the GM change timing (S4202: No), then the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to the cycle T of the beat of the BGM being reproduced. It is determined whether or not (S4205). As a result, when the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to the cycle T of the beat of the BGM being reproduced (S4205: Yes), it is the timing of the beat of the BGM, so the beat command indicating the timing of the beat of the BGM is issued. It is set (S4206).

The beat command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt process is next started. The voice lamp controller 113 can grasp the timing of the BGM beat by receiving this beat command. Therefore, the sound of the ball entering the first ball sound 64, the operation sound notifying that the frame button 22 has been operated, and the like are controlled by the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing of the BGM beat. Can be pronounced.

Since the transmission of the beat command is performed at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt processing is started next, the transmission of the beat command is permitted at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt processing is executed. The display setting process executed in the V interrupt process has a command determination process before it, and is not necessarily executed at intervals of 20 milliseconds, and there is a slight deviation. Therefore, since the beat command is not accurately generated at intervals of 20 milliseconds, if the generated beat command is directly transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the BGM beat grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 is detected. There is a risk that the intervals will be displaced. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the beat command is allowed to be transmitted at 20 millisecond intervals at which the V interrupt processing is executed, the BGM beat intervals grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 are accurately maintained. You can put it on.

Next, the value of the timer counter 233f is set to 1 (S4607). As a result, the timer counter 233f starts counting the cycle T of the BGM beats again. Then, the process proceeds to S2911.

As a result of the processing in S4205, when the value of the timer counter 233f is not equal to the cycle T of the BGM beat (S4205: No), then the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to half the cycle of the BGM beat (T/2). It is determined whether or not (S4208). When the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to half the cycle of the BGM beat (T/2) (S4208: Yes), it is the timing of the back beat of the BGM, and therefore it is the timing of the back beat of the BGM. The beat command shown is set (S4209). Therefore, it is possible to generate the sound of entering the ball, the operation sound, and the like by the sound lamp control device 113 using not only the timing of the BGM beat but also the timing of the back beat.

The beat command set here is also transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt processing is started next, similarly to the beat command indicating that it is the timing of the beat. The voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the timing of the back beat of the BGM by the beat command indicating the timing of the back beat of the BGM. The reason why the beat command indicating the timing of the back beat of the BGM is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt processing is started next is that the timing of the beat of the BGM. The reason is the same as the reason why the beat command indicating the is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt process is started next. That is, by permitting the transmission of the beat command at 20 millisecond intervals at which the V interrupt processing is executed, it is possible to accurately maintain the intervals of the beats and back beats of the BGM grasped by the voice lamp control device 113. it can.

After the processing of S4209 or by the processing of S4208, when it is determined that the value of the timer counter 233f is not equal to half the cycle (T/2) of the beat of BGM (S4208: No), then the timer counter The timer counter 233f is updated by adding 1 to the value of 233f (S4210). Then, the process proceeds to S2911.

As described above, also in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) is detected while the BGM for time saving is reproduced as the BGM, there is a ball entering. It is possible to output the incoming sound that informs the player of this fact in synchronization with the timing of the beat and back beat of the BGM. Further, while the effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is being performed, an operation sound for notifying the player that the frame button 22 has been operated is output in synchronization with the timing of the BGM beat and the back beat. can do. Therefore, the player can play the game rhythmically by riding the rhythm of the BGM, which can enhance the player's feelings about the game. Therefore, the interest in the game can be increased.

Further, when a pitching sound or an operation sound is pronounced, the pitch of the pitching sound or the operation sound is determined by using the constituent sound of the BGM code (chord) or the progress sound at the sounding timing. The player can hear the melody accompanied by the BGM by the ball entry sound or the operation sound that is produced at the pitch matching the BGM code at that time. Moreover, the melody varies depending on the timing of the ball entering, the number of balls entering, or the timing of the operation of the frame button 22 and the number of operations, so that various melody can be played by the sound of entering the ball and the operation sound. The melody can entertain the player.

In particular, since the operation sound is generated according to the beat of BGM, a rhythmic sound is output. Therefore, the player can play a game such as rhythmically operating the frame button 22 while riding on the rhythm of BGM, so that the player's feelings about the game can be enhanced. Therefore, the interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment can exhibit the same operational effects as the pachinko machine 10 according to the corresponding embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to third embodiments. ..

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. In the first to fourth embodiments, after a pitching sound or an operation sound whose pitch is a constituent sound of a chord is generated at a beat of a certain BGM, a progress sound of the same chord is played at the timing of a back beat of the following BGM. The process of back beats when a pitching or operating sound that is high is pronounced, and then a pitching or operating sound that pitches a constituent sound of the same chord is generated at the timing of the beat of the next BGM. In the case where the pitch of the sound and the constituent sound at the next beat is defined in correspondence with the pitch of the constituent sound at the first beat by the elapsed sound reproduction pitch setting table 222c (see FIG. 6) explained.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the pitches of the back sound and the constituent sound of the next beat in such a case are compared with the key of the BGM being reproduced (main tone of the entire BGM) and the current pitch. It is calculated by calculation from the BGM code and the pitch of the first beat.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described focusing on the points different from the first embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and their illustration and description will be omitted. It is needless to say that the invention realized in place of the first embodiment in the fifth embodiment can be applied to the pachinko machine 10 of the second to fourth embodiments. The invention realized in place of the first embodiment in the fifth embodiment can also be applied to the pachinko machines of the sixth to eighth embodiments described later.

61 and 62, the details of the starting winning sound output process (S2122) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. 61 and 62 are flowcharts showing the starting winning sound output process (S2122).

The starting winning sound output process in the fifth embodiment is different from the starting winning sound output process in the first embodiment when the progress sound is output as the winning sound at the timing of the back beat of BGM (S2172: Yes). , In the case where the winning sound is output at the point of executing the process of S4402 (see FIG. 62) instead of the process of S2174 (see FIG. 30) of the first embodiment, and when outputting the winning sound at the timing of the beat of BGM. If the elapsed sound is generated (S2160: Yes), the process of S4401 (see FIG. 61) is executed instead of the process of S2164 (see FIG. 29). The other processes (S2151 to S2163, S2165 to S2173, S2175 to 2179) executed in the start winning sound output process are the same as those in the first embodiment.

In the processing of S4402 (FIG. 62), the pitch of the winning sound reproduced at the previous beat, which is read from the pitch information memory 223k by the processing of S2173 executed immediately before, and the key of the BGM being reproduced, Based on the current BGM chord, the pitch of the winning sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord is calculated (S4402).

For example, in the key of the BGM being played (for example, C Major), the tonic of the key (“C” in this example) matches the current chord (“C” in this example), and the previous beat If the pitch of the winning sound reproduced in step 1 is the same as the root sound of the current chord (completely once) (“do” in the above example), the pitch of the winning sound to be sounded on the back beat (elapsed sound) , A pitch that is 2 degrees higher than the root note of the chord (“re” in the above example) is calculated.

In the key of the BGM being played (for example, C Major), the tonic of the key (“C” in this example) and the current chord match (“C” in this example), and playback is performed at the previous beat. If the pitch of the selected winning tone is 3 degrees higher than the root tone of the current chord (“Mi” in the above example), the chord root is set as the pitch (elapsed tone) of the winning tone to be sounded on the back beat. The pitch of a perfect 4 degrees (“fa” in the above example) is calculated from the sound.

In the key of the BGM being played (for example, C Major), the current chord is 4 degrees higher (“F” in this example) than the keynote (“C” in this example) of the key, and the previous beat If the pitch of the winning sound reproduced in step 1 matches the root sound of the current chord (completely once) (“Fa” in the above example), the pitch of the winning sound to be sounded on the back beat (elapsed sound) , A pitch that is 2 degrees higher than the root note of the chord (“SO” in the above example) is calculated.

In the BGM key being played (for example, C Major), the current chord is 4 degrees higher (“F” in this example) than the keynote (“C” in this example) of the key, and If the pitch of the winning sound reproduced at the beat of 3 is higher than the root sound of the current chord by 3 degrees (“LA” in the above example), the pitch of the winning sound to be sounded at the back beat (passing sound) , A pitch higher by 4 degrees (“si” in the above example) is calculated from the root note of the chord.

Similar to the processing of S4402 (FIG. 62), the processing of S4401 (FIG. 61) is the pitch of the winning sound reproduced at the previous beat read from the pitch information memory 223k by the processing of S2163 executed immediately before. Then, the pitch of the winning sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord is calculated from the key of the BGM being reproduced and the chord of the current BGM (S4401).

For example, in the key of the BGM being played (for example, C Major), the tonic of the key (“C” in this example) matches the current chord (“C” in this example), and the previous beat If the pitch of the winning sound reproduced in step 1 matches the root sound of the current chord (completely once) (“do” in the above example), the pitch of the winning sound to be sounded at the current beat (composition note) As a result, a pitch whose pitch is three degrees higher (“mi” in the above example) is calculated from the root note of the chord. In other words, in this case, the winning sound whose pitch is the root note of the current chord is sounded in the previous beat, and the winning sound whose pitch is two times higher than the root note of the current chord is pronounced in the immediately preceding back beat. At the current beat, a winning sound with a pitch higher than the current chord by a pitch of 3 degrees is generated (in the above example, the winning sounds are pronounced in the order of "do", "re", and "mi").

In the key of the BGM being played (for example, C Major), the tonic of the key (“C” in this example) and the current chord match (“C” in this example), and playback is performed at the previous beat. If the pitch of the winning sound made is 3 degrees higher than the root sound of the current chord (“M” in the above example), the pitch of the winning sound (constituent sound) to be generated at the current beat is From the root sound, the pitch of perfect 5 degrees (“So” in the above example) is calculated. In other words, in this case, a winning note with a pitch that is three times higher than the root note of the current chord is generated on the previous beat, and a winning note that has a pitch that is four degrees higher than the root note of the current chord on the immediately preceding back beat. It is pronounced, and a winning sound with a pitch of 5 degrees higher than the root sound of the current chord is pronounced at the current beat (in the above example, the winning sounds are pronounced in the order of "mi" "fa" "so"). ).

In the key of the BGM being played (for example, C Major), the current chord is 4 degrees higher (“F” in this example) than the keynote (“C” in this example) of the key, and the previous beat If the pitch of the winning sound reproduced in step 1 is the same as the root note of the current chord (completely once) (“fa” in the above example), the pitch of the winning sound to be played at the current beat (composition note) As a result, a pitch higher by 3 degrees (“la” in the above example) is calculated from the root note of the chord. In other words, in this case, a winning sound whose pitch is the root note of the current chord is generated in the previous beat, and a winning note whose pitch is two times higher than the root note of the current chord is pronounced in the immediately preceding back beat. At the current beat, a winning sound with a pitch higher than the current chord by a pitch of 3 degrees is pronounced (in the above example, the winning sounds are pronounced in the order of "Fa", "So" and "La").

In the BGM key being played (for example, C Major), the current chord is 4 degrees higher (“F” in this example) than the keynote (“C” in this example) of the key, and If the pitch of the winning sound reproduced at the beat is higher than the root sound of the current chord by 3 degrees (“LA” in the above example), the pitch of the winning sound to be played at the current beat (composition sound) As a result, a pitch that is 5 degrees higher than the root sound of the chord (“do” in the above example) is calculated. In other words, in this case, a winning note with a pitch that is three times higher than the root note of the current chord is generated on the previous beat, and a winning note with a pitch that is four degrees higher than the root note of the current chord is emitted on the immediately preceding back beat. It is pronounced, and the winning sound with a pitch of 5 degrees higher than the root sound of the current chord is pronounced at the current beat (in the above example, the winning sounds are pronounced in the order of “la”, “shi”, “do”). ).

In this way, by calculating the pitch of the winning sound reproduced at the previous beat, the key of the BGM being reproduced, and the chord of the current BGM, the pitch of the winning sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord is calculated. It is possible to calculate the scale (scale) determined according to the key set for the BGM, but only the pitch of the tonic changes according to that key, and This is because the height relationship) is always constant.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, after the pitching sound or the operation sound having the pitch of the chord component sound is generated at a certain BGM beat, the same chord is generated at the timing of the back beat of the subsequent BGM. In the case of pronouncing a ball entry sound or an operation sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of, and when a ball entry sound or an operation sound whose pitch is the constituent sound of the same chord is generated at the timing of the beat of the next BGM, Since the pitches of elapsed sounds on the back beat and the constituent sounds on the next beat are calculated by calculation from the key of the BGM being played, the code of the current BGM, and the pitch of the first beat, It is possible to dispense with the elapsed sound reproduction pitch setting table 222c provided in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to fourth embodiments. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, for each chord that can be taken by BGM, the pitch of the constituent sound at the first beat, the elapsed sound at the back beat, and the pitch of the constituent sound at the next beat are set. Need not be stored in association with each other, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity required for the program ROM 222.

Also in the fifth embodiment, in the sound editing/output processing (see FIG. 27), the frame button operation sound output processing (S2137) that is executed when an effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is being performed. The details are almost the same as the start winning sound output process (see FIGS. 61 and 62). Specifically, the start prize winning counter 223d used in the start winning sound output processing is replaced with the frame button operation number counter 223f, and the sound to be generated is replaced with the winning sound by the operation sound. Become. By executing the frame button operation sound output process, it is possible to achieve the same operational effect as the operation sound with the winning sound output by the starting winning sound output processing. That is, it is necessary to store the pitch of the constituent sound at the first beat and the pitch of the constituent sound at the back beat and the pitch of the constituent sound at the next beat in association with each other for each chord that can be taken by the BGM. Since it does not exist, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity required for the program ROM 222.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment can exhibit the same operational effects as the pachinko machine 10 according to the corresponding embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to fourth embodiments. ..

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the BGM is changed, the BGM after the change is always reproduced from the beginning of the prepared data. Then, in the first embodiment, each time the BGM is changed, the timer counter 223h is initialized to "1" and the changed timer counter 223h is updated every 1 millisecond while counting the cycle of the changed BGM beat. The case was explained.

On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, when the BGM is changed, the BGM of a specific type among the BGMs that have been reproduced until then is not muted (silenced) in the audio output, but is not stopped. , Start playing a new BGM. While the new BGM is being reproduced, the muted BGM is continuously reproduced and is output in the state of the volume level 0 (silence). Here, the timer counter 223h counts the cycle of the beat of the BGM for which reproduction is newly started, while the value of the timer counter 223h that has counted the cycle of the beat of the muted BGM is temporarily stored in the RAM 223( It is saved in a timer counter holding memory 223n) which will be described later, is updated every millisecond even during mute, and the cycle of the BGM beat continues to be counted.

When the output of the muted BGM is performed again at the volume level that can be heard by the player, the BGM (the muted BGM) is unmuted, and the BGM is output from the audio output device 226 at a predetermined volume level. Output. At this time, a value for counting the beats of the muted BGM (BGM that has been unmuted) that has been temporarily saved and updated is set again in the timer counter 223h, and the cycle of the beats of the BGM is reset. Continue counting. As a result, even during this mute, it is possible to continue correctly counting the cycle of BGM beats that are continuously reproduced and output at the volume level 0. Therefore, even if the BGM is once muted, the sound is reproduced, the lamp display device 227 is turned on/blinked, and the first accessory 87 is operated at the timing of the beat or the back beat of the BGM after the mute is released. , Can be controlled.

In the sixth embodiment, when the jackpot effect and the demonstration effect are not executed on the third symbol display device 81 as a specific type of BGM to be muted, and there is a winning in the first entrance 64. The BGM (hereinafter, referred to as “normal BGM”) reproduced in the period in which the variable effect can be performed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described as an example. Further, when the reach effect is executed during the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 when the normal BGM is being reproduced, the sound output of the normal BGM is muted to set the reach effect BGM. An example will be described in which the normal BGM is unmuted when the reproduction is finished and the reach effect is finished.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described focusing on the points different from the first embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and their illustration and description will be omitted.

FIG. 63 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment. The RAM 223 in the sixth embodiment is the same as the first embodiment in the reserved ball number counter 223a, the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b, the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c, the start winning prize counter 223d, the frame button operation effect flag 223e, and the frame button operation count. In addition to the counter 223f, the pointer 223g, the timer counter 223h, the elapsed tone pronunciation flag 223j, and the pitch information memory 223k, the RAM 223 of the first embodiment has at least a timer counter holding memory 223n.

The timer counter holding memory 223n is a memory for continuously counting the cycle of the muted normal BGM beat even during muting. In the sound lamp control device 113, when the reach effect is started during the reproduction of the normal BGM that is reproduced during the period in which the variable effect can be performed, the sound output of the normal BGM is muted at the start of the reach effect. , The reproduction of the reach effect BGM is started. At this time, the value of the timer counter 223h up to that point, that is, the value of the timer counter 223h at the time when the normal BGM beat cycle is being counted is temporarily stored in the timer counter holding memory 223n. Then, the timer counter holding memory 223n is incremented by 1 every 1 millisecond by the MPU 221, and is initialized to "1" when the value of the timer counter holding memory 223n matches the value of the cycle T of the beat of the normal BGM. By doing so, the update process is performed. After that, when the normal BGM is unmuted, the value of the timer counter holding memory 223n at that time is set again in the timer counter 223h.

Here, while the audio output of the normal BGM is muted, the timer counter 223h counts the cycle of the beat of the reach effect BGM that is audio-output during that time. As a result, the MPU 221 performs control such that sound reproduction, lighting/flashing of the lamp display device 227, and operation of the first accessory 87 are performed at the timing of the beat or back beat of the reach effect BGM. Therefore, during that time, according to the rhythm of the reach effect BGM, voice can be output, the lamp display control device 227 can be turned on/blink, and the first accessory 87 can be operated. It is possible to play a game rhythmically by riding the rhythm of the BGM for use.

On the other hand, while the sound output of the normal BGM is muted, the sound output of the normal BGM is only performed at the volume level 0, and the reproduction itself of the normal BGM is continuously performed. On the other hand, as described above, while the audio output of the normal BGM is muted, the timer counter holding memory 223n counts the cycle of the beat of the normal BGM, and when the normal BGM is unmuted, The value of the timer counter holding memory 223n at that time is set in the timer counter 223h. Thereby, the sound output of the normal BGM is once muted, and even after the mute is released, the timer counter 223h can accurately count the cycle of the beat of the normal BGM. Therefore, even after the mute is released, control can be performed so that the sound is reproduced, the lamp display device 227 is turned on/blinked, and the first accessory 87 is operated at the timing of the beat or the back beat of the normal BGM. Therefore, the player can again play the game rhythmically by riding the rhythm of the normal BGM.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, a sound editing/output process (S1908) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a part of the sound edit/output processing (S1908).

Note that, in the sound editing/output processing in the sixth embodiment, when the processing is executed, first, the same processing as S2121 to S2142 of the sound editing/output processing in the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 27 and 28 is performed. Execute the process.

In the sixth embodiment, after the timer counter 223h is updated in S2142, the timer counter holding memory 223n is updated (S4501). As will be described later in detail, when the normal BGM is muted, the value of the timer counter 223h at that time is set in the timer counter holding memory 223n. Then, the updating process of the timer counter holding memory 223n is performed as follows when the normal BGM is muted.

That is, when the value of the timer counter holding memory 223n is the period T of the beat of the normal BGM that is being muted, the timer counter holding memory 223n is set to 1, and the value of the timer counter holding memory 223n is set to the period T. If the value is different from, a 1 is added to the timer counter holding memory 223n. As a result, even when the normal BGM is muted and another BGM is reproduced and output, the cycle of beats of the normal BGM being muted can be continuously counted.

When the process of S4501 is executed, the same process of S2143 as in the first embodiment is executed. In the process of S2143, it is determined whether it is the BGM change timing. As the change timing of the BGM, for example, the timing of starting the reproduction of the BGM that is output when the big hit is notified and the notification of the big hit, the timing of starting or ending the reproduction of the big hit production BGM that is output during the big hit performance, and fluctuations In the effect, the reach effect is started, and there are a timing to start the reproduction of the reach effect BGM, a timing to end the reproduction of the reach effect BGM, and the like. These timings are grasped according to the control information defined in the data table set each time and the command received from the main controller 110.

When it is determined by the processing of S2143 that it is the BGM change timing (S2143: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the BGM is changed to the normal BGM (S4502). As a change to the normal BGM, when the reproduction of the big hit production BGM (more precisely, the big hit ending production BGM) is finished, or the off symbol is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, There is a timing for ending the reproduction of the reach effect BGM.

As a result of the processing in S4502, when it is determined that the change is not the normal BGM (S4502: No), it is then determined whether the change is the reach effect BGM (S4503). When it is the timing when the reach effect is started during the variable effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, it is determined by the process of S4503 that the change is to the reach effect BGM.

As a result of the processing of S4503, when it is determined that the BGM for reach effect is changed (S4503: Yes), the mute command of the normal BGM reproduced and output until then is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S4504). The sound output LSI 301 mutes the output of the normal BGM according to the mute command. As a result, the normal BGM is output by the sound output LSI 301 in a state where the volume level is 0 (that is, the sound is muted), although the reproduction itself is continuously executed.

Next, the value of the timer counter 223h is set in the timer counter holding memory 223n (S4505). Thus, even when the normal BGM is muted and another BGM is reproduced and output, the cycle of the beat of the normal BGM being muted can be continuously counted by the processing of S4501 described above. Then, the timer counter 223h can be used to count the cycle of beats of the reach effect BGM to be reproduced. Therefore, control can be performed so that the sound is reproduced, the lamp display device 227 is turned on or blinked, and the first accessory 87 is operated at the timing of the beat or back beat of the reach effect BGM. The player can be played rhythmically by riding the rhythm of the reach effect BGM.

After the processing of S4505, the same processing of S2144 to S2149 as in the first embodiment is executed, and the sound editing/output processing is ended. As a result, the reproduction of the reach effect BGM is set, and the sound output LSI 301 starts the reproduction of the reach effect BGM. Further, the timer counter 223h can start counting the cycle of beats of the reach effect BGM.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4503, when it is determined that the change is not to the reach effect BGM (S4503: No), the processing in S4504 and S4505 is skipped, and the processing in S2144 to S2149 is directly executed to edit the sound. -End output processing. Therefore, when the BGM after the change is neither the normal BGM nor the reach effect BGM, the BGM that has been reproduced until then is replaced and the reproduction of a new BGM is started. Then, at the timing of the beat or the back beat of the BGM when the reproduction is newly started, control is performed so that the sound reproduction, the lighting/blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are performed. Therefore, the player can play the game rhythmically on the rhythm of the reproduced BGM.

As a result of the processing in S4502, if it is determined that the change is to the normal BGM (S4502: Yes), then it is determined whether the change is from the reach effect BGM (S4506). As a result, if the change is from the reach production BGM (S4506: Yes), first, a reproduction production BGM reproduction stop command is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S4507), and the reach production BGM is reproduced. To do. Next, a normal BGM mute release command is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S4508). As a result, the muting of the normal BGM muted before the reproduction of the reach effect BGM is started is released.

Then, the value of the timer counter holding memory 223n at this time is stored in the timer counter 223h (S4509). By the processing of S4509, the beat cycle of the normal BGM counted by the timer counter holding memory 223n can be continuously performed using the timer counter 223h even while the normal BGM is muted. Therefore, the sound output of the normal BGM is once muted, and even after the mute is released, the timer counter 223h can accurately count the cycle of the beat of the normal BGM. Therefore, even after the mute is released, control can be performed so that the sound is reproduced, the lamp display device 227 is turned on/blinked, and the first accessory 87 is operated at the timing of the beat or the back beat of the normal BGM. Therefore, the player can again play the game rhythmically by riding the rhythm of the normal BGM.

After the process of S4509, the process shifts to the process of S2147, and it is determined whether or not the normal BGM whose mute has been released is the time saving BGM (S2147), and if it is the time saving BGM (S2147: Yes), the time saving BGM reproduction The flag 223c is turned on, the start prize winning counter 223d is initialized to 0 (S2148), and the sound editing/output process ends. As a result, the incoming sound can be generated at the timing of the beat or back beat of the BGM for time saving when the mute is released.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S2147, when it is determined that the BGM for time saving is not (S2147: No), the BGM reproduction flag for time saving 223c is set to OFF (S2149), and the sound editing/output processing ends.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment can achieve the same effects as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment described above, when changing the BGM, for a BGM of a specific type among the BGMs that have been reproduced until then, a new BGM is reproduced with the audio output muted. When the output of the muted BGM is started again at a volume level that can be heard by the player, the BGM (the muted BGM) is unmuted, and the sound output device 226 outputs the sound at a predetermined volume level. The case of outputting the BGM has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, when the BGM is changed, the BGM of a specific type among the BGMs that have been reproduced until then is in a state where the reproduction is temporarily stopped instead of being completely stopped. Then, the reproduction of the new BGM is started. When the output of the BGM that has been paused is performed again, the suspension of the reproduction of the BGM (the BGM that has been paused) is released, and the BGM is output from the audio output device 226.

Here, when the reproduction of the specific BGM is temporarily stopped, the value of the timer counter 223h at the time of the temporary stop is held in the timer counter holding memory 223n. The value of the timer counter holding memory 223n is not updated but kept held while the reproduction of the reproduction of the specific BGM is paused. Then, when the suspension of the reproduction of the specific BGM is released, the value of the timer counter holding memory 223n is stored in the timer counter 223h. As a result, the value for counting the beats of the BGM whose reproduction is paused is set again in the timer counter 223h, and the counting of the cycle of the beats of the BGM is continued.

As a result, it is possible to continue correctly counting the beat cycle of the BGM whose reproduction is temporarily stopped. Therefore, even if the BGM reproduction is temporarily stopped, after the suspension is released, the sound is reproduced, the lamp display device 227 is turned on/blink, and the first accessory 87 is operated at the timing of the beat or the backbeat of the BGM. Can be controlled so that

Further, while the reproduction of the specific BGM is temporarily stopped, the timer counter 223h is used to count the cycle of beats of the BGM reproduced at that time. As a result, in place of the temporarily stopped specific BGM, the sound is reproduced, the lamp display device 227 is turned on/blink, and the first character object 87 is reproduced at the timing of the beat or the back beat of the BGM whose reproduction is newly started. Since the control can be performed so that the operation is performed, the player can rhythmically perform the game while riding on the rhythm of the reproduced BGM.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, as a specific type of BGM in which the reproduction is temporarily stopped, the big hit effect and the demonstration effect are not executed on the third symbol display device 81, and the winning in the first entrance 64 is won. If there is, a description will be given by taking the normal BGM reproduced in the period in which the variation effect can be performed on the third symbol display device 81 as an example. Further, when the reach effect is executed during the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 when the normal BGM is being reproduced, the reproduction of the normal BGM is temporarily stopped and the reach effect BGM is displayed. An example will be described in which the pause of the normal BGM is released when the reproduction is finished and the reach effect is finished and the player is out of position.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described focusing on the points different from the sixth embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as those in the sixth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and their illustration and description will be omitted.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a part of the sound editing/output processing (S1908) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment. The point that the sound editing/output processing in the seventh embodiment is different from the sound editing/output processing in the sixth embodiment is that the timer counter holding memory 223n of S4501 executed in the sound editing/output processing of the sixth embodiment is updated. The process is not executed, the process of S4601 is executed instead of the process of S4504 of the sixth embodiment, and the process of S4602 is executed instead of the process of S4508 of the sixth embodiment.

In the process of S4601, a normal BGM playback pause command is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S4601). As a result, when it is determined that the reach effect BGM is changed to the reproduction at the BGM change timing, the sound output LSI 301 temporarily stops the reproduction of the normal BGM that has been reproduced until then. ..

Further, in the processing of S4602, a normal BGM playback pause cancellation command is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S4602). As a result, when it is determined that the reach effect BGM is changed to the normal BGM at the BGM change timing, the sound output LSI 301 performs the reproduction before the start of the reach effect BGM. The pause of the suspended normal BGM is released.

By not executing the update processing of the timer counter holding memory 223n in S4501, the value of the timer counter 223h of the normal BGM at the time when the reproduction is paused is kept held while the reproduction is paused. You can Therefore, even if the reproduction of the normal BGM is temporarily stopped by setting the value held in the timer counter holding memory 223n in the timer counter 223h when the suspension of the reproduction of the normal BGM is released. It is possible to continuously count the cycle of the beat of the normal BGM from the value of the timer counter 223h at the time when the reproduction of No. 2 is paused. Therefore, even after the suspension is released, control is performed so that the sound is reproduced, the lamp display device 227 is turned on/blinked, and the first accessory 87 is operated at the timing of the normal BGM beat or the back beat. Therefore, the player can again play the game rhythmically by riding the rhythm of the normal BGM.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment can achieve the same operational effects as the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 71. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when the BGM is changed, the BGM after the change is always reproduced from the beginning of the prepared data. Then, in the third embodiment, every time the BGM is changed, the timer counter 233f is initialized to “1” in the display control device 114, and the timer counter 233f is updated every 1 millisecond, while the changed BGM of the BGM is changed. The case of counting beat cycles has been described.

On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, when the BGM is changed, the BGM of a specific type among the BGMs that have been reproduced until then is not muted (silenced) but the audio output is muted. , Start playing a new BGM. While the new BGM is being reproduced, the muted BGM is continuously reproduced and is output at the volume level 0 (mute). Here, the timer counter 233f of the display control device 114 counts the cycle of the beat of the BGM whose reproduction is newly started, while the value of the timer counter 233f that counts the cycle of the beat of the muted BGM is: It is temporarily saved in the work RAM 233 (a timer counter holding memory 233g described later), is updated every 20 milliseconds even during mute, and the cycle of the BGM beat continues to be counted.

When the output of the muted BGM is performed again at the volume level that can be heard by the player, the BGM (the muted BGM) is unmuted, and the BGM is output from the audio output device 226 at a predetermined volume level. Output. At this time, the value for counting the beats of the BGM that has been muted (BGM that has been unmuted) that has been temporarily saved and updated is set again in the timer counter 233f, and the cycle of the beats of the BGM is reset. Continue counting. As a result, even during this mute, it is possible to continue correctly counting the cycle of BGM beats that are continuously reproduced and output at the volume level 0. Therefore, even if the BGM is once muted, the sound is reproduced, the lamp display device 227 is turned on/blinked, and the first accessory 87 is operated at the timing of the beat or the back beat of the BGM after the mute is released. , Can be controlled.

In the eighth embodiment, as in the sixth embodiment, as the specific type of BGM to be muted, the big hit effect and the demonstration effect are not executed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance opening An example will be described of the normal BGM reproduced in the period in which the variation effect can be performed on the third symbol display device 81 when there is a winning in 64. Further, when the reach effect is executed during the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 when the normal BGM is being reproduced, the sound output of the normal BGM is muted to set the reach effect BGM. An example will be described in which the normal BGM is unmuted when the reproduction is finished and the reach effect is finished.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described focusing on the points different from the third embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as those in the third embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and their illustration and description will be omitted.

FIG. 66 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment. The RAM 223 in the eighth embodiment is the same as the third embodiment in the reserved ball number counter 223a, the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b, the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c, the start winning prize counter 223d, the frame button operation effect flag 223e, and the frame button operation. The number counter 223f, the pointer 223g, the elapsed tone pronunciation flag 223j, the pitch information memory 223k, the one beat flag 223l, and the back beat flag 223 are included, and the normal BGM mute flag 223p and the normal BGM mute flag 223p are included in the RAM 223 of the third embodiment. It has at least a BGM mute release flag 223q.

The normal BGM mute flag 223p is a flag indicating whether or not to mute the sound output of the normal BGM. When it is on, it indicates that the sound output of the normal BGM is muted, and when it is off, the sound output of the normal BGM is indicated. Indicates not to mute. The normal BGM mute flag 223p is set to the initial value “OFF” in the initial value setting process of the RAM, which is executed in the startup process executed when the power is turned on.

Here, the display control device 114 determines whether or not to mute the normal BGM, and when it is determined to mute the normal BGM, transmits a normal BGM mute command to the audio lamp control device 113. When the MPU 221 determines that the normal BGM mute command is received in the display command determination process for determining the command received from the display control device 114, the MPU 221 sets the normal BGM mute flag 223p to ON. In the sound editing/output processing, the MPU 221 refers to the normal BGM mute flag 223p, and when the normal BGM mute flag 223p is turned on, sets the normal BGM mute command in the sound output LSI 301 to output the normal BGM sound. Mute the output. Then, when the normal BGM mute command is set in the sound output LSI 301, the MPU 221 sets the normal BGM mute flag to OFF.

The normal BGM mute cancellation flag 223q is a flag indicating whether or not to cancel the mute of the normal BGM audio output. When the normal BGM mute cancel flag 223q is on, it indicates that the normal BGM audio output is unmuted. This indicates that the muting of the BGM audio output is not canceled. The normal BGM mute release flag 223q is set to the initial value “OFF” in the initial value setting process of the RAM, which is executed in the startup process executed when the power is turned on.

Here, the display control device 114 determines whether or not to cancel the normal BGM mute, and when it is determined to cancel the normal BGM mute, the normal BGM mute cancel command is issued to the audio lamp control device 113. To send. When the MPU 221 determines in the display command determination process that the normal BGM mute cancel command has been received, the MPU 221 sets the normal BGM mute cancel flag 223q to ON. In the sound editing/output processing, the MPU 221 refers to the normal BGM mute cancel flag 223q, and when the normal BGM mute cancel flag 223q is on, sets the normal BGM mute cancel command to the sound output LSI 301 and Unmutes the BGM audio output. Then, when the MPU 221 sets the normal BGM mute cancellation command in the sound output LSI 301, it sets the normal BGM mute cancellation flag to OFF.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, details of the work RAM 233 in the display control device 114 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 in the eighth embodiment differs from the work RAM 233 in the third embodiment in that it has at least a timer counter holding memory 233g.

The timer counter holding memory 233g is a memory for the display control device 114 to continue counting the cycle of the muted normal BGM beats even during muting. In the display control device 114, when the reach effect is started during the reproduction of the normal BGM reproduced during the period in which the variable effect can be performed, the sound output of the normal BGM is muted in accordance with the start of the reach effect. Then, a normal BGM mute command is transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113. Then, the display control device 114 transmits a BGM reproduction start command for instructing the reproduction start of the reach effect BGM to the audio lamp control device 113, so that the audio effect control device 113 reproduces the reach effect BGM. Be started.

At this time, the timer counter holding memory 233g temporarily stores the value of the timer counter 233f up to that point, that is, the value of the timer counter 233f at that time when the period of the beat of the normal BGM is being counted. Then, the timer counter holding memory 233g is incremented by 1 by the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds, and the value of the timer counter holding memory 223n is the BGM beat cycle T (beat cycle (millisecond)) at 20 milliseconds. When it matches the value of (divided value), it is initialized to “1”, thereby performing the update process.

After that, the display control device 114 determines the timing for canceling the normal BGM mute, and when canceling the normal BGM mute, sends a normal BGM mute cancel command to the audio lamp controller 113. At this time, the MPU 231 sets the value of the timer counter holding memory 233g at that time in the timer counter 233f again.

Here, while the sound output of the normal BGM is muted, the timer counter 233f counts the period of the beat of the reach effect BGM that is sound-output during that time. As a result, the MPU 231 transmits a beat command to the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing of the reach effect BGM beat or back beat. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, control is performed such that voice reproduction, lighting/flashing of the lamp display device 227, and operation of the first accessory 87 are performed at the timing of the beat or back beat of the reach effect BGM. Do. Therefore, during that time, according to the rhythm of the reach effect BGM, voice can be output, the lamp display control device 227 can be turned on/blink, and the first accessory 87 can be operated. It is possible to play a game rhythmically by riding the rhythm of the BGM for use.

On the other hand, while the sound output of the normal BGM is muted, the sound lamp control device 113 only outputs the sound of the normal BGM at the volume level 0, and the reproduction of the normal BGM itself is continuously performed. There is. On the other hand, as described above, while the sound output of the normal BGM is muted, the timer counter holding memory 233g counts the cycle of the beat of the normal BGM, and when the normal BGM is unmuted, The value of the timer counter holding memory 233g at that time is set in the timer counter 233f.

As a result, the sound output of the normal BGM is once muted, and even after the mute is released, the timer counter 233f can accurately count the cycle of the beat of the normal BGM. Therefore, even after the mute is released, the display control device 114 can transmit the beat command to the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing of the normal BGM beat or the back beat. Therefore, the audio lamp control device controls so that the sound reproduction, the lighting/blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are performed at the timing of the normal BGM beat or the back beat even after the mute release. Therefore, the player can again play the game rhythmically by riding the rhythm of the normal BGM.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, details of the display determination processing (S2603) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the display setting process.

The difference between the display setting process in the eighth embodiment and the display setting process in the third embodiment is that the BGM change is made when it is determined that the BGM change timing is reached as a result of the process of S3611 (S3611: Yes). The point is that the processing (S4700) is executed, and the point that the timer counter holding memory 233g is updated (S4710) after the timer counter 233f is updated by the processing of S3619 or S3622.

Although details will be described later, when the normal BGM is muted, the value of the timer counter 233f at that time is set in the timer counter holding memory 233g. Then, the updating process of the timer counter holding memory 233g (S4710) is performed as follows when the normal BGM is in the mute state.

That is, when the value of the timer counter holding memory 233g is the cycle T of the beat of the normal BGM that is being muted, the timer counter holding memory 233g is set to 1, and the value of the timer counter holding memory 233g is set to the cycle T. If the value is different from, a 1 is added to the timer counter holding memory 223n. As a result, even when the normal BGM is muted and another BGM is reproduced and output, the cycle of beats of the normal BGM being muted can be continuously counted.

Next, details of the BGM changing process (S4700) will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the BGM change processing (S4700) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

In this BGM changing process, a BGM reproduction start command for instructing the audio lamp control device 113 to start the reproduction of the BGM according to the type of BGM to be changed is transmitted. In the BGM changing process, it is determined whether or not the audio output of the normal BGM is to be muted, and when the audio output of the normal BGM is muted, the normal BGM mute command for instructing the audio lamp control device 113 to mute the audio output of the normal BGM is executed. To send. Further, in the BGM changing process, it is determined whether or not to mute the normal BGM audio output, and when the mute is canceled, an instruction to unmute the normal BGM audio output is issued to the audio lamp control device 113. A normal BGM mute release command is transmitted.

Specifically, when this BGM changing process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the change is to the normal BGM (S4701). As the change to the normal BGM, the timing to end the big hit production (more accurately, the big hit ending production), the timing to end the reach production by stopping the off symbol on the third symbol display device 81, etc. There is.

As a result of the processing in S4701, if it is determined that the change is not the normal BGM (S4701: No), then it is determined whether the change is the reach effect BGM (S4702). When it is the timing when the reach effect is started during the variable effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, it is determined by the process of S4702 that the change to the reach effect BGM is made.

As a result of the processing of S4702, if it is determined that the BGM for reach effect is changed (S4702: Yes), the normal BGM mute command for muting the normal BGM that has been reproduced and output until then is output to the voice lamp control device. It transmits to 113 (S4703). As a result, the audio output of the normal BGM is muted in the audio lamp control device 113. That is, the normal BGM is output by the sound output LSI 301 in a state where the volume level is 0 (that is, mute), although the reproduction itself is continuously executed.

Next, the value of the timer counter 233f is set in the timer counter holding memory 233g (S4704). As a result, even when the normal BGM is muted and another BGM is reproduced and output, the beat cycle of the normal BGM being muted can be continuously counted by the processing of S4710 described above. Then, the timer counter 233f can be used to count the cycle of beats of the reach effect BGM to be reproduced. Therefore, the display control device 114 can transmit the beat command to the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing of the beat or back beat of the reach effect BGM. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 performs sound reproduction, lighting/blinking of the lamp display device 227, and operation of the first accessory 87 at the timing of the beat or back beat of the reach effect BGM indicated by the beat command. As described above, since the control can be performed, the player can play the game rhythmically by riding on the rhythm of the reach effect BGM.

After the processing of S4704, the same processing of S3612 to S3614 as in the third embodiment is executed, and the BGM changing processing ends. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 is instructed to start the reproduction of the reach effect BGM, and the voice lamp control device 113 starts the reproduction of the reach effect BGM. Further, counting of the beat cycle of the reach effect BGM by the timer counter 233h can be started.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S4702, when it is determined that the change is not to the reach effect BGM (S4702: No), the processing of S4703 and S4704 is skipped, the processing of S3612 to S3614 is executed, and the BGM is changed. The process ends. As a result, when the changed BGM is neither the normal BGM nor the reach effect BGM, the voice lamp control device 113 is instructed to replace the BGM that has been played so far and start playing a new BGM. R. Then, at the timing of the beat or back beat of BGM at which reproduction is newly started, control is performed so that sound reproduction, lighting/blinking of the lamp display device 227, and operation of the first accessory 87 are performed. Therefore, the player can play the game rhythmically by riding on the rhythm of the reproduced BGM.

As a result of the processing in S4701, if it is determined that the change is to the normal BGM (S4701: Yes), then it is determined whether the change is from the reach effect BGM (S4705). As a result, if the change is from the reach effect BGM (S4705: Yes), first, the normal BGM mute cancellation command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S4706). As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, the reproduction of the reach effect BGM is stopped, and the mute of the normal BGM muted before the reproduction of the reach effect BGM is started is released.

Then, the value of the timer counter holding memory 233g at this time is stored in the timer counter 233f (S4707). Then, the BGM changing process ends. By the processing of S4707, the cycle of the beat of the normal BGM counted by the timer counter holding memory 233g can be continuously performed using the timer counter 233f even while the normal BGM is muted. Therefore, the sound output of the normal BGM is once muted, and even after the mute is released, the timer counter 233f can accurately count the cycle of the beat of the normal BGM. Therefore, even after the mute is released, the beat command can be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing of the normal BGM beat or the back beat. As a result, the audio lamp control device 113 performs the reproduction of the sound, the lighting/blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 at the timing of the beat or the back beat of the normal BGM indicated by the beat command. Since the control can be performed, the player can again play the game rhythmically by riding the rhythm of the normal BGM.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the details of the display command determination processing (S3701) executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the display command determination processing (S3701).

The difference between the display command determination process in the eighth embodiment and the display command determination process in the third embodiment is that the normal BGM mute command and the normal BGM mute cancel command transmitted from the display control device 114 in the eighth embodiment are different. This is the point where the processing for is added.

Specifically, in the display command determination processing of the eighth embodiment, first, the same processing as the processing of S3801 to S3816 executed in the display command determination processing of the third embodiment is executed. When it is determined that the beat command has not been received as a result of the processing in S3813 (S3813: No), it is then determined whether or not the normal BGM mute command has been received in the eighth embodiment (S4801). .. If it is determined that the normal BGM mute command has been received (S4801: Yes), the normal BGM mute flag 223p is set to ON (S4802), and the display command determination process ends. As a result, the MPU 221 mutes the sound output of the normal BGM when it determines that the normal BGM mute flag 223p is ON during the sound editing/output processing.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4801, if it is determined that the normal BGM mute command is not received (S4801: No), then it is determined whether or not the normal BGM mute cancel command is received (S4803). When it is determined that the normal BGM mute cancel command is received (S4803: Yes), the normal BGM mute cancel flag 223q is set to ON (S4804). As a result, when the MPU 221 determines that the normal BGM mute release flag 223q is ON during the sound editing/output processing, the MPU 221 stops the reproduction of the reach effect BGM and then mutes the sound output of the normal BGM. To release.

After the processing of S4804, the processing proceeds to S3801. Then, it is determined whether or not the normal BGM whose mute has been released is the time saving BGM (S3801), and if it is the time saving BGM (S3801: Yes), the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is set to ON (S3811), If it is not the BGM for time saving (S3810: No), the BGM reproduction flag 223c for time saving is set to OFF (S3812). As a result, while the BGM for time saving is being played back as the BGM, the sound of entering the ball into the first entrance 64 is notified by the processing of S2134 and S2135 of the sound editing/output processing (see FIG. 56). The start winning sound output process is executed at the timing of the beat or back beat of the time saving BGM. When the processing of S3811 or S3812 ends, the display command determination processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 71, a sound editing/output process (S1908) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a part of the sound edit/output processing (S1908).

In the sound editing/output processing of the eighth embodiment, when the processing is executed, first, the sound editing/output processing of S4001 and S2128 to S2141 of the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 56 and 57 is performed. Perform the same processing.

Then, in the eighth embodiment, it is determined by the process of S2140 that there is no end information of the frame button operation effect (S2140: No), or the process of S2141 sets the frame button operation effect flag 223e to OFF. Then, it is determined whether or not the normal BGM mute flag 223p is turned on (S4901). When the normal BGM mute flag 223p is on (S4901: Yes), the normal BGM mute command is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S4902), and the normal BGM mute flag 223p is turned off (S4904). By the processing of S4902, the sound output LSI 301 mutes (silences) the output of the normal BGM according to this mute command. That is, the normal BGM is output by the sound output LSI 301 in a state where the volume level is 0 (that is, mute), although the reproduction itself is continuously executed.

If it is determined that the normal BGM mute flag 223p is off after the process of S4904 or by the process of S4901 (S4901: No), then it is determined whether the normal BGM mute release flag 223q is on. (S4905). As a result, if the normal BGM mute release flag 223q is on (S4905: Yes), first, a reproduction stop command of the reach effect BGM is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S4906), and the reproduction of the reach effect BGM is stopped. To do. Next, a normal BGM mute cancellation command is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S4907), and the normal BGM mute cancellation flag 223q is turned off (S4908). By the processing of S4907, the muting of the normal BGM muted before the reproduction of the reach effect BGM is started is released.

When it is determined that the normal BGM mute release flag 223q is off after the processing of S4908 or by the processing of S4905 (S4905: No), the processing of S4002 and S4003 of the sound editing/output processing in the third embodiment. The same processing is executed and the sound editing/output processing is ended.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment can achieve the same operational effects as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment.

The "third pattern" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "identification information" described in the claims and each of the following gaming machines, and the "variable display" described in the above embodiment is claimed. And the "dynamic display of identification information" described in each gaming machine below.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed. For example, each of the embodiments, by adding a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the other embodiment to the embodiment, or by exchanging with a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the embodiment, The embodiment may be modified and configured. Further, the numerical values given in the above embodiments are examples, and it is naturally possible to adopt other numerical values.

For example, in each of the above-described embodiments, when a ball wins the first starting opening 64 while the BGM for time saving is played as the BGM, the winning sound for stocking the winning and notifying the winning is generated. The explanation has been given on the case of sounding at the timing of the beat and back beat of the time saving BGM, but the pronunciation of the winning sound at the timing of the beat of BGM and the back beat is not necessarily limited to the time when the beat of the time saving BGM is being reproduced. However, the winning sound may be generated for any BGM at the timing of the beat or back beat of the BGM. As a result, the winning sound is generated in synchronization with the beat of BGM, etc., so that a rhythmic sound is output. Therefore, the player can play the game rhythmically by riding the rhythm of the BGM, which can enhance the player's feelings about the game. Therefore, the interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, when a ball hits the special winning opening (big opening) 65a while the jackpot performance is being performed, the winning sound is stocked and the winning sound for notifying the winning of the jackpot production BGM. You may pronounce at the timing of the beat and the back beat. As a result, the joy of winning a large number of prize balls by winning a ball in the special winning opening 65a during the jackpot production period is further enhanced by the winning sound that is pronounced according to the rhythm of the BGM, and Can be more satisfied. Further, by changing the pitch of the winning sound by the method described in each of the above-described embodiments, it is possible to play a melody that matches the chord progression of the jackpot performance BGM with the winning sound. Therefore, this melody can further enhance the player's satisfaction.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the ball is continuously inserted into the first ball entrance 64, or when the frame button 22 is continuously operated, the balls are stocked at the timing of the back beat of the BGM. The number of balls or the number of operations is 2 or more, the incoming sound or the operation sound is pronounced at the timing of the immediately preceding beat, and the BGM code at the timing of the back beat of that BGM and the timing of the beat of the immediately following BGM The case has been described in which the pitching sound or the operation sound having the pitch of the elapsed sound of the chord is generated on the condition that the chord of the BGM of the chord matches. Then, the pitched sound or operation sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord sounded at the timing of the back beat of the BGM, and the pitch sound which is the constituent sound of the chord sounded at the timing of the beat of the immediately preceding BGM. By sandwiching the ball sound or operation sound with the ball sound or operation sound whose pitch is the component sound of the chord generated immediately after the BGM beat, the melody played by the ball sound or operation sound is generated. The case where the player is given the impression of being in line with the BGM code has been described. On the other hand, the number of balls entered at the timing of the back beat of the BGM when the balls are continuously entered into the first entrance 64 or when the frame button 22 is continuously operated. Alternatively, if the number of operations is two or more, and a ball input sound or an operation sound is pronounced at the timing of the immediately preceding beat, the BGM code at the timing of the back beat of that BGM and the BGM at the timing of the beat of the immediately following BGM are generated. Irrespective of whether or not they coincide with the chord, the pitching sound or operation sound with the elapsed sound as the pitch may be generated at the timing of the back beat of the BGM. In this case, the pitch of the ball input sound or the operation sound generated at the timing of the beat of the BGM immediately after is determined from the pitch of the preceding beat (previous beat) from the constituent sounds of the BGM chord at that timing. The chord in the chord) and the pitch at the timing of the back beat (the passing sound of the chord at that time) are used to select the pitch according to the scale set according to the key of the BGM. Good. As a result, even if the chord progress sound is selected as the pitch of the pitching sound or the operation sound, and even if the chord is changed at the timing of the beat immediately after that, a melody that does not cause discomfort along with the chord progression of the BGM will be produced. , Can be played by the sound of entering the ball or the sound of operation.

In each of the above embodiments, when the ball is continuously inserted into the first ball entrance 64 or when the frame button 22 is continuously operated, not only the timing of the BGM beat but also the BGM The case has been described in which the back-beat timing is also used to generate the ball entry sound or the operation sound. On the other hand, in addition to the BGM beat and the back beat, the entrance sound and the operation sound may be generated at the timing of ¼ of the BGM beat. As a result, a more complicated rhythm can be engraved by the ball entry sound and the operation sound, so that the player can be more enjoyed by the ball entry sound and the operation sound.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which, for example, a winning sound immediate reproduction effect is prepared for the pronunciation of the incoming sound when the time saving BGM is being reproduced. That is, as a notice effect that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is high, in the variation effect, the winning sound is not output at the timing of the BGM for time saving or the back beat, but is input to the first entrance 64. The case has been described in which when a ball is present, an effect of outputting a ball entry sound at a predetermined pitch is prepared without waiting for the timing of the BGM for time saving or the back beat. As a notice effect that suggests that the degree of expectation of this jackpot is high, a winning sound shift series may be prepared in addition to the winning sound immediate reproduction effect or instead of the winning sound immediate reproduction effect. That is, when there is a ball entering the first ball entrance 64, a ball sound is produced with a slight shift from the timing of the beat or back beat of the time saving BGM, for example, by shifting by 1/10 of the beat cycle. You may prepare the effect to do. It is possible that the player may feel a sense of incongruity due to the sound of the ball being input being out of sync with the timing of the beat or back beat of the time saving BGM, and the game state may shift to a special gaming state of jackpot. You can have a strong sense of expectation.

Further, for each of the above embodiments, an operation sound immediate reproduction effect or an operation sound shift effect may be prepared for the operation sound. That is, when the operation button 22 is operated while the effect requiring the operation button 22 is being performed, the operation sound is not generated at the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat, but the operation button 22 is operated. An effect may be provided in which an operation sound is immediately generated when the operation is performed. Alternatively, when the operation button 22 is operated while the effect requiring the operation button 22 is being performed, the operation sound is slightly shifted from the timing of the beat or back beat of the BGM, for example, 1/(1) of the beat cycle. You may shift only 10 and you may provide the effect which pronounces an operation sound. Although the player who operates the frame button 22 thought that the operation sound would be generated at the timing of the beat and the back beat of BGM, when the frame button 22 was operated, the operation sound was immediately generated. Or, it is possible to give a strong sense of expectation that it will shift to a special gaming state of big hits by operating sound being generated at the timing of beats and back beats of BGM, and frame buttons It is possible to make the operation of 22 more enjoyable.

In addition, a plurality of variations of the above-mentioned winning sound immediate reproduction effect, an effect of causing the winning sound to be generated while being shifted from the timing of the beat or back beat of the time saving BGM, or the above-described operation sound immediate reproduction effect or operation sound deviation effect. You may make it perform as one aspect of what is called a continuous notice production performed continuously over production. For example, when the first winning random number counter C1 acquired with a certain starting winning as a trigger indicates a big hit, the above-described winning sound immediate reproduction effect is generated for all pending variable effects at that time. Alternatively, an effect in which the winning sound is generated while being shifted from the timing of the beat or back beat of the time saving BGM, or an operation sound immediate reproduction effect or an operation sound deviation effect may be executed. Accordingly, when there is a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or an operation of the frame button 22 over a plurality of fluctuation effects, the timing of the beat or back beat of the time saving BGM is not waited. In addition, since it is possible to output a pitching sound or an operation sound at a predetermined pitch, or to make the winning sound or the operation sound be generated while being shifted from the timing of the beat or back beat of the time saving BGM, such a prize The player can be made to hear more sounds and operation sounds, and the player can be made aware of the greater variety of games.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the winning sound or operation sound generated at the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat is stored, and when a jackpot occurs, the stored winning sound or operation sound is played during the jackpot performance. You may do so. As a result, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of superiority to the jackpot while listening to the melody of the reproduced winning sound or operation sound. Also, after the game is over, the player operates the frame button 22 to display a QR code (registered trademark) including the stored winning sound and operation sound information on the third symbol display device 81, and the player The QR code may be photographed by a mobile phone with a camera so that it can be registered in a predetermined server. Then, when a player plays a game with a pachinko machine of the same model, by inputting the password acquired from the predetermined server into the pachinko machine, the winning sound or operation sound registered in the server is hit by a jackpot. You may be able to reproduce when you do. As a result, by listening to the melody of the winning sound or the operation sound reproduced in the past, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of superiority to the jackpot. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the winning sound or the operation sound is sounded at the timing of the beat or the back beat of the BGM, the pitch of the winning sound or the operation sound to be sounded is determined in accordance with the BGM code, or The function of determining the pitch of the winning sound or the operation sound using the elapsed sound of the code may be executed only when the password obtained from the predetermined server is input to the pachinko machine. .. As a result, since such a function can be provided only to a specific player, it is possible to enhance the player's interest by producing a special effect.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display reserved ball number command to the display control device 114 without delay when the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is updated has been described. In the voice lamp control device 113, information in which the value of the holding ball number counter 223a is updated is stocked, and the value of the updated holding ball number counter 223a is displayed and controlled at the timing of the beat or back beat of BGM. A display reserved sphere count command for notifying the device 114 may be transmitted to the display control device 114. Thereby, in the display control device 114, at the timing of the beat or the back beat of the BGM, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the updated number of reserved balls is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. In other words, the addition/disappearance of the number of reserved balls is performed in accordance with the rhythm of BGM, so that the player can play a rhythmic game.

Further, in the case of producing the incoming sound at the timing of the BGM beat or the back beat, at least at such timing, the incoming sound is generated at the timing at which the incoming sound is produced. A display reserved ball number command indicating the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a may be transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the updated number of reserved balls is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 together with the sound of the incoming ball sound, so that the player can play a more rhythmic game. Can be done.

In addition, in the third, fourth, and eighth embodiments, when the display lamp control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command from the voice lamp control device 113, the display reserved ball number command is displayed without delay. The case of displaying the number of holding balls corresponding to the number of holding balls indicated by is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the display lamp control device 114 uses the voice lamp control device 113 to display the number of holding balls for display. When the command is received, the display control device 114 waits for the timing of the beat and the back beat of the BGM that is being reproduced, and displays the number of holding balls for the number of holding balls indicated by the holding ball number command for display. It may be displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, addition/disappearance of the number of reserved balls is performed according to the rhythm of BGM, so that the player can play a rhythmic game.

In the second and fourth embodiments, the case where the variation time of the variation effect is set in accordance with the cycle of the beat of BGM and the variation effect is ended at the timing of the beat of BGM has been described. On the other hand, the variation time of the variation effect is set regardless of the cycle of the BGM beat, and the variation effect is apparently stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the BGM beat immediately before the end of the variation effect. After that, the third symbol may be oscillated vertically until the original stop display timing is reached. As a result, it can be seen to the player that the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 has ended at the timing of the BGM beat, and the player is given the impression that the variation effect has been performed according to the rhythm of the BGM. be able to. In this case, the stop sound of the third symbol is also generated at the timing of the beat of BGM immediately before the end of the variation effect, when the variation effect is apparently stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Good. As a result, it is possible to give a stronger impression to the player that the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed at the timing of the BGM beat.

In the first and third embodiments, the case where the BGM is started to be reproduced from the beginning when the BGM change timing is reached has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, during reproduction of the BGM for time saving. When a reach occurs in the time zone and the BGM for the reach is played back, the BGM for the time saving is muted and continues to be played in the mute state, and after the reach is finished, the BGM for the time saving is stopped together with the stop of the playback of the BGM for the reach. The output of the time saving BGM may be restarted by canceling the mute. In this case, since the time saving BGM continues to be reproduced while the reach BGM is being reproduced, the timer counter 223h for counting the timing of the BGM beat counts even while the time saving BGM is muted. Need to continue. As a result, even if the reach BGM is reproduced during the reproduction of the time saving BGM, it is possible to accurately determine the timing of the beat or back beat of the time saving BGM. Also, when a reach occurs during playback of the time saving BGM and the BGM for the reach is played back, the playback of the time saving BGM is temporarily stopped, and after the reach is finished, the playback of the reach BGM is stopped. Alternatively, the pause of the time saving BGM may be released, and the reproduction may be restarted from the paused position. In this case, the timer counter 223h that counts the timing of the BGM beat needs to be kept held even while the time saving BGM is temporarily stopped. As a result, even if the reach BGM is reproduced during the reproduction of the time saving BGM, it is possible to accurately determine the timing of the beat or back beat of the time saving BGM.

In the first, third, sixth to eighth embodiments, when the BGM reproduction is started after the jackpot is over, the BGM reproduction may be started together with the start of the variable effect. In this case, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect and the time during which the fluctuation effect provided between the fluctuation effects when the fluctuation effect is continuously performed are not executed are set to be a multiple of the BGM beat cycle. It may be set to. As a result, at least until the number of times the variable effect is held becomes 0, the variable effect starts and ends at the timing of the beat of the BGM, so that the player can be provided with a rhythmic game that matches the rhythm of the BGM.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where one game ball 13 is provided with one first entrance 64 for starting a big hit lottery when a ball is entered has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of this, a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances where the balls are independently detected and the jackpot lottery is started may be provided in the game board 13. In this case, the number-of-holding-balls command that the main control device 110 transmits to the voice lamp control device 113 when there is a hold at each of the first entrances indicates which of the first entrances is the hold. Information may be included. In addition, the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 313 when the variation is started may include information indicating which of the first entrances is the variation effect held. Good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entrance, and when a reserved ball number command is received, the first ball entered indicated by the reserved ball number command. When the number of holding balls for the mouth is set to the number of holding balls and the variation pattern command is received, if the number of holding balls for the first entrance indicated by the variation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entrance The number of reserved balls can be counted for each.

In addition, when a plurality of first entrance openings are provided, one first entrance opening is provided with a blade member that performs an enlarging/reducing operation (or opening/closing operation), and the blade member is in an expanded state (or open). The ball may easily enter when the blade member is in the state), and may be difficult (or unable to enter) when the blade member is in the contracted state (or closed state). .. At this time, the blade member may be more likely to be in an expanded state in the one first ball inlet when the gaming state is in the probability changing state or the time saving state than in the normal ventilation state. On the other hand, the other first ball entrance may have a vane member and may be in a state in which the ball is always easy to enter. In addition, in the case of a big hit as a result of a jackpot lottery that is carried out with the entry into one first entrance, a jackpot as a result of the jackpot drawing that is carried out with the entry into another first entrance It may be configured such that a jackpot of a type advantageous to the player (for example, 15R certainty variation jackpot) can be selected more easily than in the case. If the pachinko machine has these configurations, and the game state is normal, let the player enter the ball into the other first entry slot and make a lot of big hit lottery, so that the player can play the ball. If it is fired and the game state is in a certain change state or a normal state, the ball member is put into the first entrance hole where the blade member is likely to be in an expanded state, so that a jackpot of a type advantageous to the player can be obtained. You can have the player shoot a ball. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a variety of ways of playing the game, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In addition, when a plurality of first entrances are provided, the variation effect that is suspended corresponding to the entry into one first entrance is changed to another first entrance. May be executed with priority over the variable effect that is suspended in correspondence with. In particular, in the case of a big hit as a result of the big hit lottery that is carried out with the entry into the first first entrance, a jackpot of a type advantageous to the player (for example, 15R probability variation big hit) is likely to be selected. In the case of being configured, priority is given to the variable effect that is suspended corresponding to the entry into the one first entry opening, so that an advantageous type of jackpot is given to the player. It can be easily given. Therefore, the expectation of the player can be increased.

In addition, when a plurality of first entrances are provided, the entrance sound may be generated when all the first entrances are entered. At this time, regardless of which first entrance has the entrance, if there is an entrance, the entrance sound may be generated at each BGM beat or back beat timing. Since the incoming sound is generated at the timing of many BGM beats or back beats, the player can hear the melody without delay. On the other hand, the timing at which the incoming sound is generated when there is a ball may be controlled for each first ball entrance. That is, in this case, if the plurality of first entrances are entered at substantially the same time, the entrance sound for each first entrance is sounded at the same BGM beat or back beat timing. Then, at this time, the pitch of each incoming sound may be determined so as to generate a chord that matches the BGM code at that time. As a result, the player can enjoy the sound of music, so that a more enjoyable game can be provided.

Further, when a plurality of first entrance openings are provided, the entrance sound may be generated only when the ball enters the one first entrance opening. If the one first entrance is configured so that a jackpot of a type advantageous to the player (for example, a 15R probability variation jackpot) can be easily selected, the degree of the entry sound being pronounced In addition, the player can easily know that there is a ball in the one first entrance for which the type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player is easily selected, and the expectation for the game can be increased. .. In addition, since the incoming sound is pronounced at the timing of the beat or the back beat of the BGM, it is possible to increase the expectation according to the incoming sound that is pronounced according to the rhythm of the BGM, and the player can play the game rhythmically. You can enjoy In particular, in the present embodiment, the sound of the incoming ball is generated when the gaming state is in the time saving state, but the state in which the one first entrance is easier to enter in the time saving state than in the normal state If it is, the player is in a state of strongly wanting to know whether or not there is a ball at the one first ball entrance when it is in a time saving state. In such a situation, while the BGM for time saving is being reproduced, the player is allowed to make a sound of the ball entering only when there is a ball entering the first entrance of the one, so that the player can It is possible to know that there is a ball at the first ball entrance by the ball entry sound that is produced at the pitch matching the chord of the BGM for time saving, in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM for time saving. Therefore, the player can increase the sense of expectation for the game while adjusting to the rhythm of BGM. Further, in this case, if the variation effect suspended corresponding to the entry into the one first entrance is preferentially executed, the entry into the one first entrance is performed. Since the corresponding fluctuating effect is gradually digested, the number of reserved balls becomes the maximum number of reserved balls and the balls that have entered the first first entrance are not invalidated without being reserved. In the present embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holding-balls command from the main control device 110, the sound of entering the ball is pronounced as a ball is entered, and the first entrance is not held. No incoming sound is produced for each incoming ball. On the other hand, by making a pitching sound for the entrance to the first entrance for which the variation effect is preferentially executed, the pending variation effect continues to be digested. It is easy to hold the ball entering the first ball entrance, so that it is possible to generate a lot of ball sounds for the ball entering the first ball entrance. Therefore, it is possible to continuously generate the sound of the ball entering sound and entertain the player. On the contrary, the variation effect for the entrance to the other first entrance is kept on hold until all the variation effects for the entrance to the one first entrance are executed. The situation in which the variable effect held for the mouth reaches the maximum number of holding balls immediately and the holding does not decrease from there. Therefore, even if the sound for entering the other first entrance is produced, while the variation effect for the maximum number of reserved balls continues to be held, there is another entrance for the other first entrance. However, since the incoming sound is not pronounced, it gives the player the impression that the melody due to the incoming sound is interrupted. On the other hand, such a situation can be suppressed by generating the incoming sound only when the ball enters the one first entrance.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holding-balls command from the main control device 110, it is configured to sound a ball-entering sound as if there is a ball-in. That is, the incoming sound is not sounded for the incoming to the first incoming opening 64 which is not held. On the other hand, when the main controller 110 detects a ball entering the first ball entrance 64, the main controller 110 confirms that there is a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 regardless of whether the ball is held. The command to be notified may be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 may temporarily stock the incoming ball by receiving the command and generate the incoming sound. As a result, although it is possible to pronounce even the incoming balls for which the incoming sounds have not been held, the incoming sounds are output for more incoming balls. Or melody can be played by the incoming ball sound that is pronounced according to BGM. Therefore, the player can be more entertained.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the pitching sound and the operation sound are pronounced at a pitch matching the chord of the BGM and the back beat, but instead of this, the BGM is generated. Regardless of the timing of the beat or the back beat, there is no delay at the timing when it is detected that the player has entered the first entrance 64 or operated the frame button 22, and it matches the BGM code at that time. The pitching sound or the operation sound may be generated at the pitch. As a result, a melody accompanied by BGM can be formed by the incoming sound and the operation sound, and can be heard by the player. In addition, the melody varies depending on the timing of ball entry and operation, the number of ball entries and the number of operations. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with various melodies played by the sound of entering the ball and the sound of operation depending on the time.

In each of the above embodiments, the frame rate (frame update cycle) and the BGM tempo (cycle of beats) in the third symbol display device 81 are not considered. However, for example, in the above-described embodiment, the frame update cycle in the third symbol display device 81 is 20 milliseconds, while the beat cycle is 375 milliseconds if the BGM tempo is 160 BPM, so strictly speaking, , The frame update timing in the third symbol display device 81 and the timing of the beat of BGM have a maximum deviation of 15 milliseconds. Generally, the deviation between the image and the sound is not a problem as long as it is smaller than the frame update period. However, there may be a case where the user wants to display an image on the third symbol display device 81 in time with the timing of the beat of BGM. In this case, for example, in the voice lamp control device 113, the frame update timing in the third symbol display device 81 is monitored, and a predetermined effect image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at a certain beat timing, and it is adjusted to that. When a sound is to be generated by sounding, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the update timing of the frame which comes immediately after the timing of the beat, and the sound output LSI 301 responds to the display of the effect image. You may make it instruct|indicate the pronunciation of the sound. Thereby, although slightly deviated from the original BGM beat timing, a predetermined effect image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at almost the beat timing, and a sound corresponding to the display can be output. In addition, the monitoring of the update timing of the frame in the third symbol display device 81 in the voice lamp control device 113, for example, the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display After instructing to start driving the device 81, the display control device 114 updates the frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the instruction at 20 millisecond intervals, while the voice lamp control device 113 It may be performed by always counting 20 milliseconds from the instruction. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 may receive the V interrupt signal from the display control device 114 to monitor the frame update timing of the third symbol display device 81 in the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the sound output LSI 301 may be instructed to reproduce the BGM by changing the tempo of the BGM so that the cycle of the BGM beat becomes a multiple of the frame update cycle in the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the BGM tempo is 160 BPM, the sound output LSI 301 is instructed to output the BPM so that the beat cycle becomes 380 milliseconds and the BGM tempo becomes 157.9 BPM, for example. May be. As a result, the frame update timing in the third symbol display device 81 and the BGM beat timing can always be made to coincide with each other, so that the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 accurately in time with the BGM beat timing. Can be displayed. If the BGM tempo is determined so that the beat cycle of the BGM is a value that is closest to the original beat cycle of the BGM in the multiples of the frame update cycle in the third symbol display device 81, the BGM tempo is determined. Since the tempo of does not change significantly, it is possible to let the player hear the BGM without a feeling of strangeness.

In the eighth embodiment, when the BGM is changed, the BGM of a specific type among the BGMs that have been reproduced until then is started to be reproduced with a new BGM in the state where the audio output is muted (silenced). When the output of the muted BGM is performed again at the volume level that can be heard by the player, the BGM (the muted BGM) is unmuted and the BGM is output from the audio output device 226 at a predetermined volume level. The case was explained. On the other hand, when changing the BGM, regarding the BGM of a specific type among the BGMs that have been reproduced until then, the reproduction of a new BGM is started in a state of temporarily stopping the reproduction instead of completely stopping the reproduction. When outputting the BGM that has been paused again, the BGM (the BGM that has been paused) may be output from the audio output device 226 by canceling the pause of the reproduction of the BGM. .. In this case, for example, instead of the normal BGM mute command transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment at the timing of changing to the reach effect BGM, the display control device 114 is replaced. The normal BGM reproduction pause command may be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the voice lamp control device 113. Then, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the normal BGM reproduction pause command is received, the reproduction of the normal BGM may be paused by setting a reproduction pause command of the normal BGM in the sound output LSI 301. Further, instead of the normal BGM mute cancel command transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment at the timing of changing the reach effect BGM to the normal BGM, the display control device is displayed. A normal BGM reproduction pause release command may be transmitted from 114 to the voice lamp control device 113. Then, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the normal BGM reproduction suspension cancellation command is received, the reproduction suspension of the normal BGM is canceled by setting a reproduction suspension cancellation command of the normal BGM in the sound output LSI 301. do it. Then, in the display setting process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the seventh embodiment, the process of S4701 may be made non-execution. As a result, the value of the timer counter 233f of the normal BGM at the time when the reproduction is temporarily stopped can be held in the timer counter holding memory 233g while the reproduction is temporarily stopped. Therefore, even when the reproduction of the normal BGM is temporarily stopped by setting the value held in the timer counter holding memory 233g in the timer counter 233f when the suspension of the reproduction of the normal BGM is released. It is possible to continuously count the cycle of the beat of the normal BGM from the value of the timer counter 233f at the time when the reproduction of is stopped. Therefore, even after the suspension is released, control is performed so that the sound is reproduced, the lamp display device 227 is turned on/blinked, and the first accessory 87 is operated at the timing of the normal BGM beat or the back beat. Therefore, the player can again play the game rhythmically by riding the rhythm of the normal BGM.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, in the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, initial values are set in various flags and memories provided in the RAM 223. The case where it is set (S1810 in FIG. 23) and initialized is described. That is, in each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off and then turned on again, the voice lamp control device 113 always starts operating from the initial state. On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main controller 110 causes the main controller 110 to back up the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (normal state, probability variation state, time saving state, etc.) or , The number of balls to be held is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a command, and the voice lamp control device 113 sets values in various flags and memories provided in the RAM 223 in accordance with the command received from the main control device 110. You may do it. As a result, the audio lamp control device 113 performs the audio output and the lamp output that reflect the state backed up by the main control device 110 immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and the display control device 114. On the other hand, it is possible to instruct the main controller 110 to display an image that reflects the state backed up on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, for example, when a momentary power failure occurs, the voice output, the lamp output, and the image display on the third symbol display device 81 are performed from the state immediately before the power failure, so that the player can play with peace of mind. Can continue.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the display control device 114 prepares the display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation effect is, for example, Display data table is prepared for each element such as, "Variation start-up", "High-speed fluctuation", "Announcement effect", "Normal reach", "Super reach", according to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command. After identifying the elements required for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the elements required for the identified variation effect are combined into one, and the final regular display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do so. In many cases, "variation start-up", "high-speed variation", "normal reach", etc. are commonly displayed for each variation pattern. Therefore, by making the variable effect into elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element in this way, the data table can be efficiently provided.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval (every 20 milliseconds in each of the above embodiments) of the image for one frame at which the drawing process is finished. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the third symbol display device 81 is driven so that the image for one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), the V interrupt signal is displayed every time the image for one frame is displayed. By sending, the time interval can be kept accurate without timing.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the image controller 237 identifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image expanded in advance from the other frame buffer. The case where the information is read out and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame where the image controller 237 should develop the drawn image each time the drawing list is received. The buffers may be selected alternately, and the image information previously developed may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, every time the image controller 237 transmits the image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, it outputs the image information to the frame buffer where the drawn image should be developed and the third symbol display device 81. The frame buffer to be used may be replaced.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the demonstration effect is to stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbols to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not added, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Alternatively, the third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semitransparent state. Further, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a rear image that is completely different from the third symbol or the rear image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the display data table defines the content (drawing content) of the image to be drawn at that time in correspondence with the time that represents 20 milliseconds as one unit has been described. The display content is not limited to the above, and any display content may be defined at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, if the third symbol display device 81 is to display an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30 second. Since one frame image is displayed every time, the display data table may define the display contents at intervals of 1/30 second.

Further, in the display data table, as the sprite type to be drawn defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite type itself is not designated, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be defined. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the address and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case of displaying the high-speed fluctuation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed so as not to be visually recognized by the player when the fluctuation effect is executed has been described. Thus, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 and decreases the value of the number of held balls counter 223a by 1 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not. For example, in the fluctuation process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 which is subtracted in accordance with the fluctuation pattern command being set by the fluctuation start process (S1207) is set. Even if the holding ball number command is set so as to be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, the holding ball number command may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. Good. Accordingly, the voice lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the number of holding balls held in the main control device 110.

In each of the above embodiments, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display. The command may be directly transmitted from the main controller 110 to the display controller 114. Also, by connecting a voice lamp control device to the display control device, a command for instructing the output of each voice and lighting of the lamp from the display control device and a character product operation start command for instructing the operation start of the character product are provided. It may be configured to transmit to the control device. At this time, the display control device determines a detailed variation pattern based on the command directly received from the main control device 110, and based on the detailed variation pattern, the display control device instructs the audio lamp control device. A command for instructing output of each voice, lighting/blinking of a lamp, and operation start of a movable accessory may be transmitted. At this time, the timing of the beats and back beats of the BGM is managed by the display control device, and at the timing of the beats and back beats of the BGM, the display control device outputs to the audio lamp control device each voice output and lamp. It is also possible to send a command for instructing the lighting/blinking of, and the start of operation of the movable accessory.

Furthermore, the voice lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and the increase in cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed. When the voice lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, a flag is generated instead of the command generated by the voice lamp control device 113 and notified to the display control device 114, and based on the flag, The display data table may be set in the display data table buffer 233a, or various image data such as a warning image may be generated. Further, instead of the display type command generated by the display control device 114 and notified to the voice lamp control device 113, a display type flag is generated, and based on the display type flag, audio output, lamp lighting/flashing, The operation of the first accessory 87 may be controlled.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the winning of the first ball entrance 64 and the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 are configured to be reserved up to four times, respectively, but the maximum number of reserved balls is four times. However, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls of the variable effect based on the winning in the first ball entrance 64 is a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is equal to the number of reserved balls. The display may be performed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variation effect, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the symbol as identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The symbols may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a horizontal direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbols, and, for example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed together with the symbols, or may be displayed in a variety of motions or changed separately from the symbols. It also includes the presentation display that is said. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right property, a 3rd right property, etc.) that can increase the expectation value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. May be implemented as). Alternatively, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever with a coin inserted and a symbol effective line is determined, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that “a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms the identification information is provided, The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific".In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example. In the slot machine, for example, the fluctuation of the symbol after the operation lever is operated is started at the timing of the beat of the BGM, and the sound is generated at the start of the fluctuation, so that the rhythm of the BGM It is possible to provide the player with a game tailored to. In addition, when a coin is inserted, a beep button for setting the bet number from the coins stored in advance instead of inserting the coin is operated, and a set sound when the bet number is set is set. However, it is possible to provide the player with a game in accordance with the rhythm of BGM by making it sound at the timing of the beat of BGM.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is caused to do so. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restriction on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

A dynamic display execution unit is provided that includes a determination unit that makes a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and a dynamic display execution unit that causes the display unit to dynamically display the identification information based on the determination result by the determination unit. At least a period during which a game is played by the player in the gaming machine that gives the player a predetermined game value when the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means. Output means for outputting music inside, judgment means for judging the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, and performance for performing the performance in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music judged by the judgment means An execution unit, and a gaming machine A1.

According to the gaming machine A1, the determination means makes a determination triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and based on the determination result, the dynamic display of the identification information is performed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means. It When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is provided with a predetermined game value, thereby giving the player an interest. Here, the music is output by the output means at least during the period when the player is playing the game. The timing of the beat of the music output by this output means is determined by the determination means. Then, the effect is executed by the effect executing means at the timing of the beat of the music judged by the judging means. As a result, the effect is produced in accordance with the rhythm of the music, so that the player can play the game while riding the rhythm of the music, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine A1 is provided with a setting means for setting the pronunciation of an alarm sound for notifying the occurrence of the event triggered by the occurrence of the event caused by the progress of the game, and the effect execution means is set by the setting means. A gaming machine A2, which is a sounding means for generating the notification sound according to the timing of the beat of the music judged by the judging means.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are produced. That is, triggered by the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game, the setting means sets the sounding of the notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event. Then, the set notification sound is sounded by the sounding means at the timing of the beat of the music judged by the judging means. That is, the notification sound is generated in order to notify the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game, at least in synchronization with the beat timing of the music output during the game being played by the player. As a result, the notification sound is generated in accordance with the rhythm of the music, so that the player can play the game while riding the rhythm of the music, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

The game machine A2 has at least a main control means for controlling a game, the output means, the determination means, and the sounding means, and a sound for controlling output of a sound based on a command from the main control means. Control means, the sound control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring the cycle of the beat of the music output by the output means, and the determination means starts the output of the music by the output means. The timing of the beat of the music output by the output means is determined based on the elapsed time and the cycle of the beat of the music acquired by the acquisition means. Machine A3.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced. That is, the game is controlled by the main control means, and the output of the sound is controlled by the sound control means based on the command from the main control means. The sound control means has at least output means, judgment means, and sounding means. Here, the cycle of the beat of the music output by the output means is acquired by the acquisition means. Then, the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means is determined based on the lapse of time after the output of the music is started by the output means and the cycle of the beat of the music acquired by the acquisition means. It is judged by. Then, the notification sound set by the setting means is sounded by the sounding means at the timing of the beat of the music judged here. In this way, the output of the music, the acquisition of the cycle of the beat of the output music, the determination of the timing of the beat of the output music, and the generation of the notification sound at the timing of the beat of the music based on the determination And are performed in the sound control means. Therefore, there is an effect that the timing of the beat of the music can be accurately determined, and the notification sound can be notified in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music that is accurately determined.

In the gaming machine A2, main control means for controlling a game, display control means for controlling display on the display means based on a command from the main control means, the output means, the determination means, and the sound generation. Means for controlling sound output based on a command from the main control means and a command from the display control means, wherein the display control means includes the sound control means. Output start determination means for determining the start of the output of the music by the output means based on the command from, and when the output start determination means determines the start of the output of the music by the output means, Acquiring means for transmitting an instruction command for instructing the start of music output to the sound control means, and acquiring a cycle of beats of the music for which output start is instructed by the instruction command transmitted by the transmitter Means, the time lapse from the time when the instruction command is transmitted by the transmission means, and the cycle of the beat of the music acquired by the acquisition means, based on the beat of the music output by the output means. Notification means for judging the timing and notifying the sound control means of the timing of the beat, wherein the judging means outputs the output based on the notification of the timing of the beat of the music from the notifying means. A gaming machine A4 characterized by determining the timing of the beat of the music output by the means.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced. That is, the game is controlled by the main control means, and the display on the display means is controlled by the display control means based on the command from the main control means. Further, the sound control means controls the sound output based on the command from the main control means and the command from the display control means. In the sound control means, the output of the sound is controlled also based on the command from the display control means, so that the sound can be easily output in accordance with the image displayed on the display means. The sound control means has at least output means, judgment means, and sounding means. Here, in the display control means, the start of the music output by the output means is judged by the output start judgment means based on the command from the main control means. When the output start determination means determines that the output means starts outputting the music, an instruction command for instructing the start of the music output is transmitted to the sound control means by the transmission means of the display control means. Also, the beat cycle of the music whose output is instructed by the instruction command transmitted by the transmission means is acquired by the acquisition means of the display control means. Then, the timing of the beat of the music output by the output unit is determined based on the lapse of time after the transmission unit transmits the instruction command and the cycle of the beat of the music acquired by the acquisition unit. The notification means notifies the sound control means of the timing of the beat. The determination means of the sound control means determines the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means based on the notification of the timing of the beat of the music from the notification means. Then, the notification sound set by the setting means is sounded by the sounding means at the timing of the beat of the music judged here. In this way, the timing of the beat of the music output by the output unit is determined by the display control unit and is notified to the sound control unit, so that an image that matches the timing of the beat output by the output unit is displayed on the display unit. While displaying, the notification sound can be generated at the timing of the beat. Therefore, it is possible to output a notification sound in accordance with the rhythm while showing the player an image that matches the rhythm of BGM. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enjoy the game while riding on the rhythm of the music output by the output means through the image and the sound.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, a bet number setting means for setting a predetermined game value as a bet number is provided, and the predetermined start condition is a state in which the bet number is set by the bet number setting means. In this case, the condition is that the starting operation means that can be operated by the player is operated, and the setting means sets the bet number when the bet number is set by the bet number setting means. A gaming machine A5, characterized in that a notification sound for notifying the setting is set.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines A2 to A4, the following effect is obtained. That is, in the state where a predetermined game value is set as the bet number by the bet number setting means, the determination means makes a determination under the predetermined start condition that the player operates the start operation means, and the identification information Is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. At this time, when the number of bets is set by the bet number setting means, a notification sound for notifying the setting of the bet number is set by the setting means. As a result, the set notification sound is sounded by the sounding means at the timing of the beat of the music judged by the judging means, that is, the fact that the bet number has been set matches the rhythm of the music. Since it can be recognized by the notification sound generated by the player, the player can play the game while riding on the rhythm of the music, and the player can enjoy the game.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the output means sets a sound volume level of one music to 0 and then outputs the new music while continuing to output the one music, and the new means. And a means for setting the volume level of the one music to a predetermined level other than 0, the gaming machine continuing the output while the new music is output. The updating means for updating the information for determining the timing of the beat of the one music, wherein the determining means is the timing of the beat for the new music while the new music is output. When the output of the new music is stopped and the volume level of the one music is set to the predetermined level, the one music is updated based on the information updated by the updating means. A gaming machine A6 characterized by determining the timing of the beat.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the output means sets the volume level of one music to 0, and then the new music is output while the output of the one music is continued. Then, the output of the new music is stopped, and the volume level of one music is set to a predetermined level other than 0. In such a situation, while the new music is being output, the updating means updates the information for determining the timing of the beat of one music that continues to be output. Then, while the new music is being output, the determination means determines the beat timing for the new music, the output of the new music is stopped, and the volume level of one music becomes a predetermined level. When set, the determination means determines the beat timing for one piece of music based on the information updated by the update means. As a result, even if new music is output while the volume level of the first music is set to 0 and the output of the first music is continued, the output of the new music is stopped and the first music is output. After the volume level of is set to a predetermined level other than 0, there is an effect that the timing of the beat of one music can be accurately determined.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the output means temporarily stops the output of one music and outputs a new music, and stops the output of the new music, and outputs the one music. Means for canceling a temporary stop of output for music, and the gaming machine holds information for determining the timing of the beat of the one music while the new music is output. Holding means for determining the beat timing of the new music while the new music is output, and the output of the new music is stopped to determine the one music. On the other hand, when the temporary stop of the output is released, the timing of the beat with respect to the one music is determined based on the information held by the holding means. ..

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the output means temporarily stops the output of one music and outputs new music. Then, the output of the new music is stopped, and the temporary stop of the output for one music is released. In such a situation, the holding means holds information for determining the timing of the beat of one music while new music is output. Then, while the new music is output, the determination means determines the beat timing for the new music, the output of the new music is stopped, and the output of one music is temporarily output. When the stop is released, the determination means determines the timing of the beat for one piece of music based on the information held by the holding means. As a result, the output of one music is temporarily stopped, and even if new music is output, the output of the new music is stopped and the temporary stop of output for one music is released. After that, there is an effect that the timing of the beat of one music can be accurately determined.

A dynamic display execution unit is provided that includes a determination unit that makes a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and a dynamic display execution unit that causes the display unit to dynamically display the identification information based on the determination result by the determination unit. A game board that provides a predetermined game value to the player when the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means, and the game board is provided on the game board. A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area, a detecting means for detecting the passage of the game ball when the game ball passes through a predetermined area provided in the game area, and the detecting means. A payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls to the player when passage of the game ball in the predetermined area is detected, and an output means for outputting music at least during a period in which the game is played by the player. , Judging means for judging the timing of the beat of the music outputted by the output means, and the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area based on the detection of the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area by the detecting means. Setting means for setting the sounding of the notification sound for notification, and sounding means for generating the notification sound set by the setting means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music judged by the judging means. A gaming machine B1 characterized by comprising.

According to the gaming machine B1, the determination means makes a determination triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and based on the determination result, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means. R. When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is provided with a predetermined game value, thereby giving the player an interest. When the game ball is launched by the launching means toward the game area provided on the game board and the game ball passes through a predetermined area provided in the game area, the passage of the game ball is detected by the detecting means. Then, when the detection means detects the passage of the game balls in the predetermined area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player by the payout means. In addition, the music is output by the output means at least during the period when the player is playing the game. The timing of the beat of the music output by this output means is determined by the determination means. On the other hand, based on the fact that the detection means has detected the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area, the setting means sets the generation of the notification sound for notifying the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area. Then, the set notification sound is sounded by the sounding means at the timing of the beat of the music judged by the judging means. That is, when a game ball shot toward the game area passes through a predetermined area provided in the game area, a notification sound for notifying the passage is generated at least during the period when the game is being played by the player. It is pronounced at the timing of the beat of the output music. As a result, the notification sound that also means the payout of the game ball is pronounced according to the rhythm of the music, so that the player can hear the notification sound that also means the payout of the game ball while riding the rhythm of the music. It is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine B1, in addition to the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, the determination means also determines the timing of the equally divided position when a plurality of beats are equally divided, The sounding means is the notification sound whose sound is set by the setting means, and when the number of unsound notification sounds is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the equalized position of the positions determined by the judgment means is determined. A gaming machine B2 characterized in that the notification sound is generated by using timing as well.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, in addition to the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, the timing of the equally divided position when the beat is equally divided is determined by the determination means. Then, when the number of the notification sounds whose pronunciation is set by the setting means is not less than a predetermined number, the timing of the equally divided positions determined by the determination means is also used. A notification sound is generated by the sound generation means. As a result, when a lot of game balls pass through the predetermined area of the game board, not only at the timing of the beat of the music, but also at the timing of the equally divided position when the beat is equally divided Is pronounced, a more complicated rhythm can be carved by the alarm sound. Therefore, as the complicated rhythm is carved, it means that the game balls are passing through the predetermined area, that is, more game balls are paid out. Therefore, by notifying the music output from the output means with a complicated rhythm, it is possible to entertain the player with the rhythm, and to inform the player that many game balls are paid out. The effect is that it can be easily notified.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the establishment of the predetermined start condition includes a case where passage of the game ball in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the detection means detects the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area, the predetermined start condition is satisfied, so that the determination means makes a determination, and based on the determination result, the identification information is displayed on the display means. Is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value. As a result, a notification sound, which means not only the payout of the game balls but also the dynamic display of the identification information leading to the provision of a predetermined game value, is sounded in accordance with the rhythm of the music. By listening to while listening to the rhythm of the music, it is possible to raise expectations for the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the detecting means is provided in the game area, and the game ball is an area in which the game ball can pass only during a period in which a predetermined game value is given to the player. A gaming machine B4, which detects the passage of the game ball when it has passed.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a game ball passes through a region which is provided in the game region and is configured to allow the game ball to pass only during a period in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means. Detected by. Then, based on the fact that the detection means has detected the passage of the game ball in this area, the setting means sets the generation of the notification sound for notifying the passage of the game ball. Then, the set notification sound is sounded by the sounding means at the timing of the beat of the music judged by the judging means. In this way, during the period in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, when the game ball passes through the area configured to allow the game ball to pass only during that period, the notification sound is emitted in accordance with the rhythm of the music. To be done. Since this notification sound notifies the passage of the game ball to a special area during the period in which a predetermined game value is given, the player listens with pleasure while matching the notification sound with the rhythm of music. You can Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be increased.

A dynamic display execution unit is provided that includes a determination unit that makes a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and a dynamic display execution unit that causes the display unit to dynamically display the identification information based on the determination result by the determination unit. At least a period during which a game is played by the player in the gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to the player when the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means. Output means for outputting music inside, and a sounding means for generating an alarm sound for notifying the occurrence of the event triggered by the occurrence of the event caused by the progress of the game, and the sounding means emits the sound. Chord specifying means for specifying the chord of the music at the timing to be caused, and pitch determining means for determining the pitch of the notification sound to be generated based on the chord specified by the chord specifying means. Characteristic game machine C1.

According to the gaming machine C1, the determination means makes a determination triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means based on the determination result. R. When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is provided with a predetermined game value, thereby giving the player an interest. In addition, the music is output by the output means at least during the period when the player is playing the game. On the other hand, triggered by the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game, a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event is sounded by the sounding means. At this time, the chord of the music at the timing at which the notification sound is generated is specified by the code specifying means, and the pitch of the notification sound to be generated is determined by the pitch determining means based on the specified code. As a result, the notification sound is generated not only in accordance with the rhythm of the music, but also at a pitch that matches the chord progression of the music. Therefore, the melody suitable for the music is played by the notification sound. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine C1, the pitch determining means determines the pitch of the notification sound to be generated from among the constituent sounds constituting the code specified by the chord specifying means. ..

The gaming machine C2 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1. That is, since the pitch of the informative sound to be generated is determined by the pitch determining means from among the constituent sounds constituting the chord specified by the chord specifying means, the informative sound is formed of a musical chord and a chord. It is pronounced at the pitch. Therefore, it is possible to play a pleasant melody that composes a chord with music by means of the notification sound, and it is possible to entertain the player.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, when the code specified by the code specifying means is changed to a new code at the timing, the pitch determining means outputs the notification sound at the timing. A gaming machine C3, which determines a root sound of the chord as a pitch.

The gaming machine C3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2. That is, when the chord is specified by the chord specifying means, if the specified chord is changed to a new chord at that timing, the pitch of the chord is set as the pitch of the notification sound to be generated at that timing. The root sound is determined by the pitch determining means. When a pitch tone other than the root sound of the chord is output as a notification sound at the timing of the beat when the music chord is changed, the player recognizes the notification sound as a sound that is out of the chord, and the player May make you feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, by causing the notification sound with the pitch of the root sound to be generated, the player can hear the notification sound as a sound that matches the changed code. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can hear a sound that is comfortable to listen to.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the chord specifying means, together with the chord of the music at the timing of producing the sound, the chord of the music at the timing at which the notification sound is produced before the timing of producing the sound. And the chord of the music at the timing at which the informative sound is generated after the timing of the sound generation, and the pitch determining means uses the same chord for each chord specified by the chord specifying means. Yes, if the pitch of the notification sound generated before this timing of sounding is the constituent sound of the chord, the elapsed sound of the code is determined as the pitch of the notification sound to be sounded at this timing. A gaming machine C4 characterized by the above.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are produced. That is, together with the music chord at the timing of sounding this time, the chord of the music at the timing at which the notification sound is generated before the timing at which the sound is generated and the sound of the notification sound after the timing at which the sound is generated are generated. The chord of the music at the timing to be specified is specified by the code specifying means. Then, if the specified chords are all the same chord and the pitch of the informative sound produced before the timing of producing this sound is the constituent sound of the chord, of the informative sound to be produced at this timing As the pitch, the elapsed sound of the chord is determined by the pitch determining means. As a result, the notification sound with the musical accompaniment is generated by inserting the notification sound with the elapsed sound of the chord as the pitch in addition to the notification sound with the pitch of the music chord. Variations can be added to the sound melody. Therefore, the melody by the notification sound is not monotonous, and there is an effect that it is possible to perform a voice output that does not make the player tired.

In the gaming machine C4, the pitch determining means sets the constituent sound of the chord as the pitch of the notification sound at the timing when the notification sound is generated after the sounding timing of the notification sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound. A gaming machine C5 characterized by determining.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, the code configuration is used as the pitch of the notification sound at the timing at which the notification sound is generated after the sounding timing of the notification sound with the elapsed sound as the pitch. The sound is determined by the pitch determining means. As a result, the notification sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord is generated by being sandwiched by the notification sounds whose pitch is the constituent sounds of the chord. Even in the case of playing, there is an effect that the melody played by the notification sound can be heard by the player without a sense of incongruity, assuming that the melody played is the music chord.

In the gaming machine C4 or C5, the pitch determining means has the same chords specified by the chord specifying means, and the pitch of the informative sound generated before the timing of the sound generation is the above-mentioned. When the chord is a constituent tone, the pitch of the elapsed tone is calculated as the pitch of the notification sound to be generated at this timing based on the chord, the pitch of the constituent tone, and the main tone of the music. A gaming machine C6 characterized by being calculated more.

The gaming machine C6 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4 or C5. That is, each chord specified by the chord specifying means, that is, the code of the music at the timing of sounding, the code of the music at the timing at which the notification sound is generated before the timing of causing the sound, and the timing of causing the sound to sound. Also, the music chord at the timing at which the informative sound is generated later is the same chord, and if the pitch of the informative sound produced before the timing of producing this is the constituent sound of the chord, Based on the chord, the pitch of the constituent sound, and the main tone of the music, the pitch determining means calculates the pitch of the elapsed sound as the pitch of the notification sound to be generated at this timing. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a table for determining the elapsed sound in association with the chord of the music, the pitch of the previously pronounced constituent sound, and the main tone of the music in order to determine the elapsed sound. , A memory area for storing the table becomes unnecessary. Therefore, there is an effect that an increase in the storage capacity of the memory can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, a game board, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area provided in the game board, and a predetermined area provided in the game area A detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball when passing, and a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls to the player when the detection means detects the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area. ,, the sounding means, based on the detection of the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area by the detection means, to emit a notification sound for notifying the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area A gaming machine C7 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine C7, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6. That is, when the game ball is launched toward the game area provided on the game board by the launching means and the game ball passes through the predetermined area provided in the game area, the passage of the game ball is detected by the detecting means. R. Then, when the detection means detects the passage of the game balls in the predetermined area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player by the payout means. Further, based on the fact that the detection means has detected the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area, the sounding means produces a notification sound for notifying the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area. At this time, the chord of the music at the timing at which the notification sound is generated is specified by the code specifying means, and the pitch of the notification sound to be generated is determined by the pitch determining means based on the specified code. As a result, each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area where the predetermined number of game balls are to be paid out by the payout means, the notification sound is produced at a pitch that matches the chord progression of the music. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can further enhance the joy of paying out the game ball by the melody that matches the chord progression of the music played by the notification sound.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, a determination means for determining the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, and an occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game as an opportunity to notify the occurrence of that event Setting means for setting the sounding of the notification sound, wherein the sounding means sounds the notification sound set by the setting means at the timing of the beat of the music judged by the judging means. C8 characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the following effects are produced. That is, the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means is determined by the determination means. Further, triggered by the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game, the setting means sets the pronunciation of the notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event. Then, the set notification sound is sounded by the sounding means at the timing of the beat of the music judged by the judging means. That is, the notification sound is generated at the timing of the beat of the music output at least during the period in which the player is playing the game. As a result, a melody that matches the rhythm and chord of the music is played by the notification sound, so that there is an effect that the player can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

A dynamic display execution unit is provided that includes a determination unit that makes a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and a dynamic display execution unit that causes the display unit to dynamically display the identification information based on the determination result by the determination unit. At least a period during which a game is played by the player in the gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to the player when the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means. Display control for controlling the display of a new image on the display, the stopping of the image, or the erasing of the image according to the timing of the beat of the music output by the output device And a gaming machine D1.

According to the gaming machine D1, the determination means makes a determination upon the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and based on the determination result, the dynamic display of the identification information is performed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means. R. When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is provided with a predetermined game value, thereby giving the player an interest. Here, the music is output by the output means at least during the period when the player is playing the game. The display control unit controls the display of a new image on the display unit, the stop of the image, or the deletion of the image in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output unit. That is, a new image is displayed on the display unit, the image is stopped, or the image is erased in accordance with the rhythm of the music output by the output unit. As a result, the image displayed on the display means can be visually recognized in accordance with the rhythm of the music, so that the player can play the game while riding the rhythm of the music, and the effect that the interest in the game can be increased. is there.

In the gaming machine D1, the display control means simulates the dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means at least once in synchronization with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. A gaming machine D2, which is characterized by performing control to stop and display it.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the following effect is achieved. That is, the display control means controls the pseudo display of the dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means at least once in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. Done. As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information, together with the rhythm of the music, makes it possible to show the player, for example, the effect of increasing the expectation of being a jackpot while repeating the pseudo stop display. Together with the rhythm of music, it is possible to enhance the interest in playing games. In this way, it is possible to give the player a feeling that the dynamic display of the identification information is performed in accordance with the rhythm of music, so that it is possible to play a rhythmic game and improve the interest of the player. There is an effect that you can.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, by the control of the display control means, a setting means for setting a sound to be produced in accordance with the display of a new image, the stop of the image, or the deletion of the image performed by the display means. A gaming machine D3, wherein the sound set by the setting means is sounded in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output from the output means.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, the following effect is achieved. That is, under the control of the display control means, the setting means sets the sound to be generated in accordance with the display of a new image, the stop of the image, or the deletion of the image performed by the display means. Then, the set sound is sounded by the sounding means at the timing of the beat of the music output from the output means. As a result, not only is a new image displayed on the display unit, the image is stopped, or the image is erased, in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output unit, and the corresponding sound is also output. It is sounded at the timing of the beat of the music output by the means. Therefore, not only can the image displayed on the display unit be visually recognized in accordance with the rhythm of the music, but also the sound can be listened to, so that the player can play while riding the rhythm of the music. This has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

A dynamic display execution unit is provided that includes a determination unit that makes a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and a dynamic display execution unit that causes the display unit to dynamically display the identification information based on the determination result by the determination unit. At least a period during which a game is played by the player in the gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to the player when the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means. The dynamic display execution means includes output means for outputting music therein, and the identification information is invisible in the dynamic display of the identification information in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. A gaming machine E1 including a starting means for starting a state.

According to the gaming machine E1, the determination means makes a determination upon the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and based on the determination result, the dynamic display of the identification information is performed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means. It When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is provided with a predetermined game value, thereby giving the player an interest. Here, the music is output by the output means at least during the period when the player is playing the game. In accordance with the timing of the beat of the outputted music, the invisible state of the identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information is started by the starting means. Therefore, the dynamic display of the identification information can be shown to the player so as to start at the timing of the beat of the music, and the dynamic display of the identification information can be performed in a manner such that it is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the music. Can be made Therefore, the player can play the game while riding on the rhythm of the music, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine E1, when the start timing of the dynamic display of the identification information is different from the beat timing of the music, the start means outputs the identification information from the start timing to the beat timing of the music. A gaming machine E2, which is dynamically displayed in a visible state, and starts the invisible state of the identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information at the timing of the beat of the music.

The gaming machine E2 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1. That is, when the start timing of the dynamic display of the identification information is different from the timing of the beat of the music, the identification information is dynamically displayed in a visually recognizable state from the start timing to the timing of the beat of the music. The starter executes the dynamic display of the identification information so as to start the invisible state of the identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information at the timing of the beat. As a result, even if the start timing of the dynamic display of the identification information is different from the timing of the beat of the music, it is as if the player started the dynamic display of the identification information at the timing of the beat of the music. Can be shown to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player feel as if the dynamic display of the identification information is performed according to the rhythm of music.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the dynamic display execution means includes stop display execution means for executing stop display in the dynamic display of the identification information at the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. A gaming machine E3 characterized by the above.

The gaming machine E3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2. That is, the stop display in the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the stop display executing means at the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. Therefore, the dynamic display of the identification information can be shown to the player so as to be stopped and displayed at the timing of the beat of the music, and the dynamic display of the identification information can be performed in accordance with the rhythm of the music. Can be a player. Therefore, the player can play the game while riding on the rhythm of the music, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine E3, the stop display executing means dynamically displays the identification information at the beat of the music when the stop display timing of the dynamic display of the identification information is different from the timing of the beat of the music. Is displayed in a pseudo manner, and subsequently, the identification information is dynamically displayed in a visually recognizable state, and then the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped and displayed at the stop display timing. ..

The gaming machine E4 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3. That is, when the stop display timing of the dynamic display of the identification information is different from the timing of the beat of the music, the dynamic display of the identification information is pseudo-stop displayed at the timing of the beat of the music, and then the identification information is visually confirmed. After the dynamic display is performed in a possible state, the stop display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information so that the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped and displayed at the stop display timing. As a result, even if the stop display timing of the dynamic display of the identification information is different from the music beat timing, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped and displayed according to the music beat timing. You can make it look like you are. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player feel as if the dynamic display of the identification information is performed according to the rhythm of music.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the invisible state of the identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information, which is started by the start means in synchronization with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, The gaming machine E5, wherein the identification information is dynamically displayed at high speed.

The gaming machine E5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E1 to E4. That is, the start means starts the high-speed dynamic display of the identification information at the timing of the beat of the music. Therefore, the dynamic display of the identification information can be shown to the player so as to start at the timing of the beat of the music, and the dynamic display of the identification information can be performed in a manner such that it is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the music. Can be made Therefore, the player can play the game while riding on the rhythm of the music, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

Dynamic display execution is provided with determination means for making a determination when a predetermined start condition is met, and dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means. An operation means that can be operated by the player in the gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to the player when the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means, and Operation detecting means for detecting that the operating means has been operated, output means for outputting music at least during a period in which a player is playing a game, and timing of beats of music output by the output means are determined. Determining means, setting means for setting the sounding of an alarm sound for notifying that the operation is performed based on the operation of the operating means being detected by the operation detecting means, and the setting means. A gaming machine F1 comprising: a sounding unit that sounds the set notification sound at the timing of the beat of the music determined by the determination unit.

According to the gaming machine F1, the determination means makes a determination triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means based on the determination result. It When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is provided with a predetermined game value, thereby giving the player an interest. In addition, an operating means that can be operated by the player is provided, and when the operating means is operated, the operation is detected by the operation detecting means. On the other hand, the music is output by the output means at least during the period when the player is playing the game. The timing of the beat of the music output by this output means is determined by the determination means. Here, based on the fact that the operation of the operation means is detected by the operation detection means, the setting means sets the sounding of the notification sound for notifying that the operation has been performed. Then, the set notification sound is sounded by the sounding means at the timing of the beat of the music judged by the judging means. That is, when the player operates the operation means, the notification sound is generated in synchronization with the timing of the beat of the music. As a result, the player can enhance the enjoyment of the game by listening to the notification sound while riding the rhythm of the music. Moreover, since the user can enjoy the operation of the operation means in order to listen to the notification sound that accompanies the rhythm of music, the operation means can be positively operated. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine F1, the judging means judges not only the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, but also the timing of the equally divided position when a plurality of beats are equally divided, The sounding means is the notification sound whose sound is set by the setting means, and when the number of unsound notification sounds is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the equalized position of the positions determined by the judgment means A gaming machine F2 characterized in that the notification sound is generated by using timing as well.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the following effects are achieved. That is, in addition to the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, the timing of the equally divided position when the beat is equally divided is determined by the determination means. Then, when the number of the notification sounds whose pronunciation is set by the setting means is not less than a predetermined number, the timing of the equally divided positions determined by the determination means is also used. A notification sound is generated by the sound generation means. As a result, when the player operates the operation means a plurality of times at short intervals, not only the timing of the beat of the music, but also the timing of the equally divided position when the beat is subdivided However, since the notification sound is generated, a more complicated rhythm can be carved by the notification sound. Therefore, by engraving a complicated rhythm on the music output from the output means, it is possible to entertain the player with the rhythm and at the same time, to listen to the informative sound with the complicated rhythm, In addition, there is an effect that the player can operate the operation means.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the sounding means, based on the chord specifying means for specifying the chord of the music at the timing of the sound generation, and the chord specified by the chord specifying means, the sound of the notification sound to be produced. A game machine F3, comprising: a pitch determining means for determining a pitch.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are produced. That is, the chord of the music at the timing when the notification sound is generated is specified by the code specifying means, and the pitch of the notification sound to be generated is determined by the pitch determining means based on the specified code. As a result, the notification sound is generated not only in accordance with the rhythm of the music, but also at a pitch that matches the chord progression of the music. Therefore, the melody suitable for the music is played by the notification sound. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be increased. In addition, there is an effect that the player can positively operate the operation means in order to listen to the melody.

Dynamic display execution is provided with determination means for making a determination when a predetermined start condition is met, and dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means. An operation means that can be operated by the player in the gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to the player when the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means, and Operation detecting means for detecting that the operating means has been operated, output means for outputting music at least during a period in which the player is playing a game, and operation of the operating means is detected by the operation detecting means. Based on that, a sounding means for generating a notification sound for notifying that the operation has been performed, and the sounding means, a chord specifying means for specifying the chord of the music at the timing of the sounding, A gaming machine F4, comprising: pitch determining means for determining the pitch of the notification sound to be generated based on the code specified by the code specifying means.

According to the gaming machine F4, the determination means makes a determination upon the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and based on the determination result, the dynamic display of the identification information is performed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means. It When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is provided with a predetermined game value, thereby giving the player an interest. In addition, an operating means that can be operated by the player is provided, and when the operating means is operated, the operation is detected by the operation detecting means. On the other hand, the music is output by the output means at least during the period when the player is playing the game. Then, based on the fact that the operation of the operation means is detected by the operation detecting means, the sounding means emits a notification sound for notifying that the operation has been performed. At this time, the chord of the music at the timing at which the notification sound is generated is specified by the code specifying means, and the pitch of the notification sound to be generated is determined by the pitch determining means based on the specified code. As a result, the notification sound is generated not only in accordance with the rhythm of the music, but also at a pitch that matches the chord progression of the music. Therefore, the melody suitable for the music is played by the notification sound. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be increased. In addition, there is an effect that the player can positively operate the operation means in order to listen to the melody.

In the gaming machine F3 or F4, the pitch determining means determines the pitch of the notification sound to be generated from among the constituent sounds forming the chord specified by the chord specifying means. Machine F5.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3 or F4, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the pitch of the informative sound to be generated is determined by the pitch determining means from among the constituent sounds forming the chord specified by the chord specifying means, the informative sound is simply pronounced in accordance with the rhythm of the music. Not only are they played, but they are pronounced at the pitch at which the chords and chords of the music are formed. Therefore, it is possible to play a pleasant melody that composes a chord with music by means of the notification sound, and it is possible to entertain the player.

In any of the gaming machines F3 to F5, the pitch determining means causes the chord specified by the chord specifying means to sound at the timing when the chord is changed to a new chord at the timing. A gaming machine F6, characterized in that the root sound of the chord is determined as the pitch of the notification sound.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F3 to F6, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the chord is specified by the chord specifying means, if the specified chord is changed to a new chord at that timing, the pitch of the chord is set as the pitch of the notification sound to be generated at that timing. The root sound is determined by the pitch determining means. When a pitch tone other than the root sound of the chord is output as a notification sound at the timing of the beat when the music chord is changed, the player recognizes the notification sound as a sound that is out of the chord, and the player May make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, there is a risk that the player will stop operating the operating means. On the other hand, by causing the notification sound with the pitch of the root sound to be generated, the player can hear the notification sound as a sound that matches the changed code. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can hear a sound that is comfortable to listen to.

In any of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the chord specifying means, together with the chord of the music at the timing of producing the sound, the chord of the music at the timing at which the notification sound is produced before the timing of producing the sound. And the chord of the music at the timing at which the informative sound is generated after the timing of the sound generation, and the pitch determining means uses the same chord for each chord specified by the chord specifying means. Yes, if the pitch of the notification sound generated before this sounding timing is the constituent sound of the chord, the elapsed sound of the chord is determined as the pitch of the notification sound to be sounded at this timing. A gaming machine F7 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the following effects are achieved. That is, together with the music chord at the timing of sounding this time, the chord of the music at the timing at which the notification sound is generated before the timing at which the sound is generated and the sound of the notification sound after the timing at which the sound is generated are generated. The chord of the music at the timing to be specified is specified by the code specifying means. Then, if the specified chords are all the same chord and the pitch of the informative sound produced before the timing of producing this sound is the constituent sound of the chord, of the informative sound to be produced at this timing As the pitch, the elapsed sound of the chord is determined by the pitch determining means. With this, while the rhythm of the music is being matched, the notification sound whose pitch is the constituent sound of the chord of the music is mixed with the notification sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord, and the notification sound is emitted. As a result, it is possible to give variations to the melody by the notification sound accompanied by music. Therefore, the melody by the notification sound is not monotonous, and there is an effect that it is possible to perform a voice output that does not make the player tired.

In the gaming machine F7, the pitch determination means sets the constituent sound of the chord as the pitch of the notification sound at the timing when the notification sound is generated after the sounding timing of the notification sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound. A gaming machine F8 characterized by determining.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F7, the code configuration is used as the pitch of the notification sound at the timing at which the notification sound is generated after the sounding timing of the notification sound with the elapsed sound as the pitch. The sound is determined by the pitch determining means. As a result, the notification sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord is generated by being sandwiched by the notification sounds whose pitch is the constituent sounds of the chord. Even in the case of playing, there is an effect that the melody played by the notification sound can be heard by the player without a sense of incongruity, assuming that the melody played is the music chord.

In the gaming machine F7 or F8, the pitch determining means has the same chords specified by the chord specifying means, and the pitch of the notification sound generated before the timing of sounding is the above-mentioned. If it is a constituent sound of a chord, the pitch of the elapsed sound is calculated as the pitch of the notification sound to be generated at this timing based on the chord, the pitch of the constituent sound, and the main tone of the music. A gaming machine F9 characterized by being calculated more.

The gaming machine F9 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F7 or F8. That is, each chord specified by the chord specifying means, that is, the code of the music at the timing of sounding, the code of the music at the timing at which the notification sound is generated before the timing of causing the sound, and the timing of causing the sound to sound. Also, the music chord at the timing at which the informative sound is generated later is the same chord, and if the pitch of the informative sound produced before the timing of producing this is the constituent sound of the chord, Based on the chord, the pitch of the constituent sound, and the main tone of the music, the pitch determining means calculates the pitch of the elapsed sound as the pitch of the notification sound to be generated at this timing. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a table for determining the elapsed sound in association with the chord of the music, the pitch of the previously pronounced constituent sound, and the main tone of the music in order to determine the elapsed sound. , A memory area for storing the table becomes unnecessary. Therefore, there is an effect that an increase in the storage capacity of the memory can be suppressed.

Dynamic display execution is provided with determination means for making a determination when a predetermined start condition is met, and dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means. A movable accessory that operates based on the progress of the game in the gaming machine that gives the player a predetermined game value when the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means. In accordance with the drive means for driving the movable accessory, the output means for outputting the music at least while the player is playing the game, and the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, A game machine G1 comprising: a drive control unit that controls a drive unit so that the movable accessory operates.

According to the gaming machine G1, the determination means makes a determination triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and based on the determination result, the dynamic display of the identification information is performed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means. It When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is provided with a predetermined game value, thereby giving the player an interest. Further, a movable accessory that operates based on the progress of the game is provided, and the movable accessory is driven by the drive means. Here, the music is output by the output means at least during the period when the player is playing the game. The drive control unit controls the drive unit so that the movable accessory operates in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output unit. As a result, the movable accessory moves in accordance with the rhythm of the music, so that the player can play the game while riding the rhythm of the music, which has the effect of increasing interest in the game.

Dynamic display execution is provided with determination means for making a determination when a predetermined start condition is met, and dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means, in a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player, light emission that lights up or blinks based on the progress of the game Means, output means for outputting music at least during a game being played by the player, and the light emitting means so as to light up or blink in synchronization with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. A gaming machine G2, comprising: a light emission control unit for controlling.

According to the gaming machine G2, the determination means makes a determination triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and based on the determination result, the dynamic display of the identification information is performed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means. It When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is provided with a predetermined game value, thereby giving the player an interest. Further, a light emitting means that lights up or blinks based on the progress of the game is provided. Here, the music is output by the output means at least during the period when the player is playing the game. The light emission control means controls the light emitting means so that the light emitting means lights up or blinks in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. As a result, the light emitting means lights up or blinks in accordance with the rhythm of the music, so that the player can play the game while riding the rhythm of the music, and the interest in the game can be increased.

Dynamic display execution is provided with determination means for making a determination when a predetermined start condition is met, and dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means. At least a period during which a game is played by the player in the gaming machine that gives the player a predetermined game value when the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means. Output means for outputting music inside, and sounding means for generating a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event triggered by the occurrence of the event caused by the progress of the game, and the sounding means outputs the output. Main tone specifying means for specifying the main tone of the music output by the means, chord specifying means for specifying the chord of the music at the timing of sound generation, chord specified by the chord specifying means, and the main tone specifying means A pitch determining means that determines the pitch of the notification sound to be generated based on the generated main tone, and the gaming machine H1.

According to the gaming machine H1, the determination means makes the determination triggered by the establishment of the predetermined start condition, and the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means based on the determination result. It When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is provided with a predetermined game value, thereby giving the player an interest. In addition, the music is output by the output means at least during the period when the player is playing the game. On the other hand, triggered by the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game, a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event is sounded by the sounding means. At this time, the main tone of the music output by the output unit is identified by the main tone identifying unit, and the chord of the music at the timing when the notification sound is produced is identified by the code identifying unit. Then, the pitch of the notification sound to be generated is determined by the pitch determining means based on the specified chord and the main tone of the music. As a result, the informative sound is generated at a pitch that matches the chord progression in accordance with the scale determined by the main tone of the music, so that a melody that matches the music is played by the informative sound. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine H1, the pitch determining means determines, based on the chord specified by the chord specifying means and the main key specified by the main key specifying means, from the relationship between the main note of the main key and the chord. A gaming machine H2, characterized in that the pitch of the notification sound is calculated according to a scale determined by the main tone.

According to the gaming machine H2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1. That is, based on the chord specified by the chord specifying unit and the main tone specified by the main tone specifying unit, the pitch of the informative tone is a tone according to the scale defined by the main tone from the relationship between the main tone and the chord. It is calculated by the high determination means. In this way, the pitch can be determined by calculation in such a way that the pitch determined according to the tones set for the music is changed only by changing the pitch of the tones of the tones. This is because the height relationship of is always constant. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a table for determining the pitch, and a memory area for storing the table is unnecessary. Therefore, there is an effect that an increase in the storage capacity of the memory can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B4, C1 to C8, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F9, G1, G2, H1 and H2, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Gaming machine I1. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then fixedly displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It becomes a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the final identification information is specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B4, C1 to C8, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F9, G1, G2, H1, H2, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Game machine I2. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift sphere but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B4, C1 to C8, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F9, G1, G2, H1 and H2, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine I3 characterized by being fused. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused game machine is "provided with a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is provided. The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Other>
In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, various effect images such as a variable effect (dynamic display of identification information) are displayed on a display unit such as a liquid crystal display device in order to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-046635). The variation effect is an effect that is started when a ball enters the starting entrance (starting entrance) (start winning), and is, for example, three horizontally or vertically or 3×3 squares in the effective display area. A total of 9 symbols and the like are displayed, the symbols and the like displayed based on a predetermined game condition are scrolled, and when the scroll is stopped, a stop symbol is a predetermined combination at a predetermined stop position. It is a big hit when you are there. While such an effect is being performed, background music (Back Ground Music: BGM) is output from the gaming machine, further enhancing the interest of the game.
However, in the conventional game machine, the background music is simply being played from the speaker, and the player does not find the background music interesting, which is very useful for improving the enjoyment of the game. There was a situation that there was no.
The present technical idea has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game by using music output at least during a period in which the game is played. The purpose is to

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
22 Frame buttons (operation means)
60 game board 64 first entrance (detection means)
65a Special winning opening (detection means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
87 1st character (movable character)
87a First accessory vertical movement motor (driving means)
87e First accessory rotating motor (driving means)
110 Main controller (main control means)
111 Dispensing control device (dispensing means)
112a Ball launching unit (launching means)
113 voice lamp control device (sound control means, drive control means, light emission control means)
114 display control device (dynamic display execution means, display control means)
223n timer counter holding memory (updating means, holding means)
227 Lamp display device (light emitting means)
233g timer counter holding memory (updating means, holding means)
S1207 Variation start processing (determination means)
S1907 (setting means, operation detection means)
S2010 (setting means)
S2121 (determination means)
S2129 (Setting means)
S2131 (pronunciation means)
S2135 Start winning sound output process (sounding means)
S2137 Frame button operation sound output process (pronunciation means)
S2144 (Output means)
S2145 (acquisition means)
S2161, S2171, S2177 (code identifying means)
S2159, S2161, S2164 (pitch determining means)
S2174, S2177 (pitch determining means)
S3611 (output start determination means)
S3612 (Transmission means)
S3613 (acquisition means)
S3616 (Notification means)
S3807 (output means)
S4001 (determination means)
S4203 (acquisition means)
S4206 (Notification means)
S4401, S4402 (pitch determining means)
S4501 (update means)
S4505 (output means)
S4507, S4508 (output means)
S4710 (update means)

Claims (1)

Judgment means for making a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, instruction means for instructing to start dynamic display of identification information based on the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition, and the instruction by the instruction means as a trigger Dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means, and the predetermined identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. In the gaming machine that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player when is displayed,
At least during the period when the game is being played by the player, an output means for outputting a predetermined music under a condition different from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information instructed by the instructing means,
The dynamic display execution means,
A gaming machine comprising means for changing the visual recognition state of the identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information in accordance with the timing of the beat of a predetermined music output by the output means.

Images